Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with F fieldbus Protocol OUNDATION

Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with F fieldbus Protocol OUNDATION
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter
with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Protocol
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
Title Page
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Rosemount 2051 Pressure
Transmitter
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents
before installing, using, or maintaining this product.
For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:
Customer Central
Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions.
United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST)
Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211
Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390
North American Response Center
Equipment service needs.
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)
Outside of these areas, contact your local Emerson Process Management representative.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require
nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson
Process Management Sales Representative.
Title Page
i
Title Page
October 2014
ii
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Title Page
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Using this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Models covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Foundation fieldbus installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.7 Host files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.8 Product recycling/disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2Section 2: Configuration
2.1 Configuration overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 DD and DTM™ based interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2 The device menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.3 Basic organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.4 The Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.6 Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.7 Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.8 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.1.9 Classic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.2.1 Confirm correct device driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.3 Device capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.3.1 Link active scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.3.2 Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.4 Node address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.5 General block information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.5.1 Foundation fieldbus function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.5.2 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.5.3 Block instantiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.5.4 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.6 Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.6.1 FEATURES and FEATURES_SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.6.2 MAX_NOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.6.3 Alerts/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.6.4 PlantWeb alerts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table of Contents
iii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
2.7 Basic device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
2.7.1 Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
2.8 Analog Input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
2.8.1 Configure the AI block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
2.9 Advanced device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2.9.1 Overall configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2.9.2 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
2.9.3 Gauge scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
2.9.4 Local display (LCD display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
2.9.5 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
2.9.6 Alert configuration NE107 and PlantWeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
2.9.7 Alert simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
2.9.8 Write lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
3Section 3: Hardware Installation
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.2.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.4 Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.5 Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.6 Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.6.1 Commissioning tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.6.2 Transmitter tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.7 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.7.1 Mount the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.7.2 Impulse piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3.7.3 Process connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
3.7.4 Housing rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
3.8 Hazardous locations certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
3.9 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
3.9.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
3.9.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
3.9.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation procedure . . . . . . . .60
3.9.4 Integral manifold operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3.10 Liquid level measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
3.10.1 Open vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
3.10.2 Closed vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
iv
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
4Section 4: Electrical Installation
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
4.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
4.3 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
4.3.1 Rotating LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
4.4 Configuring transmitter security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
4.4.1 Setting security switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
4.4.2 Setting simulate switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4.5 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4.5.1 Conduit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4.5.2 Power supply for Foundation fieldbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4.6 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4.6.1 Transmitter wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4.6.2 Grounding the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.1.1 Methods and manual operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.2.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
5.3 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
5.3.1 Determining necessary sensor trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
5.3.2 Determining calibration frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
5.3.3 Compensating for span line pressure effects
(range 4 and range 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
5.4 Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
5.4.1 Sensor trim overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
5.4.2 Perform a calibration or sensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
5.5 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
5.6 Master reset method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.6.1 Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.7.1 Manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.7.2 Simulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Table of Contents
v
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
6Section 6: Troubleshooting
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
6.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
6.2.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
6.3 Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
6.3.1 Removing from service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
6.3.2 Removing terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
6.3.3 Removing electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
6.3.4 Removing sensor module from the electronics housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
6.4 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
6.4.1 Attaching electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
6.4.2 Installing terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
6.4.3 Reassembling the 2051C process flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
6.4.4 Installing drain/vent valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
6.5 Troubleshooting guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
6.6 Troubleshooting and diagnostic messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
6.7 Analog Input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
A.1 Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
A.1.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
A.2 Sensor transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
A.3 Analog input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
A.3.1 AI parameter table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
A.4 LCD display transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
A.5 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
A.5.1 Conformance to specification (±3s [Sigma]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
A.5.2 Reference accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
A.6 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
A.6.1 Range and sensor limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
A.6.2 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
A.6.3 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
A.6.4 Foundation fieldbus (Output code F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
A.6.5 Backup Link Active Scheduler (LAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
A.6.6 Standard function blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
A.6.7 PROFIBUS PA (Output Code W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
A.6.8 Wireless (Output Code X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
A.6.9 HART 1-5 Vdc Low Power (Output Code M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
vi
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table of Contents
October 2014
A.6.10 Overpressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
A.6.11 Static pressure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A.6.12 Burst pressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A.6.13 Temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A.6.14 Humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.6.15 Turn-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.6.16 Volumetric displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.6.17 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.6.18 Failure mode alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A.7 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A.7.1 Material selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A.7.2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A.7.3 Process connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
A.7.4 Shipping weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
A.8 Dimensional drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.9 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
A.9.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
A.9.2 Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
A.9.3 Rosemount 2051CF Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
A.10Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
A.11Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A.11.1 Standard configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A.11.2 Custom configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A.11.3 Commissioning tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A.11.4 Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . 189
A.11.5 Other seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A.11.6 Output information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
A.11.7 Display and Interface Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
A.11.8 Configuration buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
A.11.9 Transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.11.10 Bolts for flanges and adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.11.11 Conduit plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.11.12 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange and 2051T bracket option . . . . 191
A.11.13 Rosemount 2051C traditional flange bracket options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.12 Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Table of Contents
vii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
BAppendix B: Product Certifications
B.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B.2.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B.3 Product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
B.3.1 European Directive Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
B.3.2 Ordinary Location Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
B.3.3 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
B.3.4 Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
B.3.5 International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
B.3.6 Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
B.3.7 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
B.3.8 Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
B.3.9 Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
B.4 Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
B.5 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
B.5.1 Factory mutual 02051-1009. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
B.5.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 02051-1008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
viii
Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 1
1.1
Introduction
Overview
This manual is for the Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
communications.
This manual only describes the topics required for installation, operation, configuration, and
troubleshooting the FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter.
1.2
Using this manual
The sections in this manual provide information on configuring, installing, operating and
maintaining, troubleshooting, and calibrating 2051 Transmitters specifically for FOUNDATION
fieldbus protocol.
Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 2051
Transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and Online
variables is also included.
Section 3: Hardware Installation contains mechanical installation instructions, and field
upgrade options.
Section 4: Electrical Installation contains electrical installation instructions, and field upgrade
options.
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance provides detailed information on calibrating the
transmitter
Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common
operating problems.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well
as ordering information.
Appendix B: Product Certifications contains intrinsic safety approval information, European
ATEX directive information, and approval drawings.
1.3
Models covered
The following 2051 Transmitters are covered by this manual:


Rosemount 2051C Coplanar™ Pressure Transmitter
–
Measures differential and gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
–
Measures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar).
Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter
–

Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter
–

Measures level and specific gravity up to 300 psi (20,7 bar).
Rosemount 2051CF Series Flowmeter
–
Introduction
Measures gage/absolute pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).
Measures flow in line sizes from 1/2-in. (15mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm).
1
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
1.4
FOUNDATION fieldbus installation flowchart
Figure 1-1. FOUNDATION fieldbus Installation Flowchart
Start
1. Transmitter
installation
(Section 3.7)
2. Commissioning
tag (Section 3.6)
3. Housing
rotation
(Section 3.7.4)
1.5
Locate device
4. Set switches
and software
write lock
6. Configuration
(Section 2.1)
(Section 4.4)
5. Grounding,
wiring and
power up
(Section 4.6)
7. Zero trim the
transmitter
(Section 5.4)
Done
Transmitter overview
The Rosemount 2051C Coplanar design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP), Gage Pressure
(GP) and Absolute Pressure (AP) measurements. The Rosemount 2051C utilizes capacitance
sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 2051T and 2051CA utilize
piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements.
The major components of the Rosemount 2051 are the sensor module and the electronics
housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating diaphragms, oil fill
system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are installed within the
sensor module and include a temperature sensor and a memory module. The electrical signals
from the sensor module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing.
The electronics housing contains the output electronics board and the terminal block. The basic
block diagram of the Rosemount 2051CD is illustrated in Figure 1-3 on page 3.
For the Rosemount 2051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the
sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a
digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the
Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter.
An optional 2-line LCD display can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board
which maintains direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and
abbreviated diagnostic messages. A glass display cover is provided. The first line of eight
characters displays the actual measured value, the second line of six characters displays the
engineering units. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages.
2
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 1-2. LCD Display
Figure 1-3. Block Diagram of Operation
A
B
C
Signal Processing
Microprocessor
Temp.
Sensor
Sensor Module
Memory
*Sensor linearization
*Damping
*Diagnostics
*Engineering units
*Control function
blocks
*Communication
Digital
Communication
Memory
*Configuration
A. Sensor Module
B. Electronics Board
C. FOUNDATION fieldbus Signal to Control System
D. Field Communicator
1.6
D
Service support
Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve
Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24
hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the
product was last exposed.
Introduction
3
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management
representative for RMA instructions.
To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson
Process Management representative.
Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they
are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy
of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included
with the returned goods.
Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will
explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to
hazardous substances.
1.7
Host files
Before configuring the device, ensure the host has the appropriate Device Description (DD) or
Device Type Manager (DTM™) file revision for this device. The device descriptor can be found on
www.fieldbus.org. The DTM can be found at www.emersonprocess.com. The current release of
the Rosemount 2051 with FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol is device revision 2. This manual is for
revision 2.
1.8
Product recycling/disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in
accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
4
Introduction
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 2
Configuration
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General block information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
page 5
page 13
page 14
page 15
page 15
page 19
page 25
page 30
page 37
Configuration overview
This section contains information on commissioning and tasks that should be performed on the
bench prior to installation, as well as tasks performed after installation.
2.1.1
DD and DTM™ based interfaces
The 2051 Pressure Transmitter Rev 2 has both DD based and DTM based user interfaces
available. All device configuration and maintenance tasks can be performed using either
technology.
The DD capabilities supported will vary based on host supplier and host revision. Check with
your host supplier to determine and obtain the appropriate DD for your situation. The type of
DD your host supports may influence navigation between different functions, and the exact
steps used to perform different tasks. The device menu tree has multiple ways to navigate
between and perform tasks. Not all ways will be usable on all hosts, but at least one way will be
usable on every host.
2.1.2
The device menu tree
Device information and device tasks are organized in a menu tree structure. The complete menu
tree is shown in Figure 2-10. A partial menu tree covering the most common device tasks is
shown in Figure 2-11.
2.1.3
Basic organization
Device information and tasks are organized into three different menu tree branches. They are
Overview, Configure, and Service Tools. Information and tasks may be resident in more than a
single branch of the menu tree.
The device menu tree is the landing screen for the Handheld user interface. The device menu
tree is also permanently displayed on PC based user interfaces. On PC based user interfaces the
menu tree can be expanded or collapsed as needed to facilitate navigation.
The same device menu tree applies for both handheld and PC based user interfaces. On the
handheld, each menu tree entry has a dedicated screen (see Figure 2-3). On PC based user
Configuration
5
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
interfaces, several menu tree entries may be displayed on a single screen with each menu tree
entry used as the heading for a section of that screen (see Figure 2-2). The net result is the menu
tree can be used to navigate all DD’s and DTM’s, however the user may need to perform actions
on one screen, or several screens to perform the same task.
Figure 2-1. Configure Device Alerts-Multiple Screens
On devices with smaller screens the information and parameters necessary to complete a task
may be divided into several screens. In this figure each category of alert to be configured has a
dedicated screen shown. There are four total screens used for alert configuration.
Figure 2-2. Configure Device Alerts-Single Screen
On this PC based configuration screen, alert configuration for all four alert categories is
performed on a single screen.
2.1.4
The Home Screen
The home screen provides access to the three main branches of the menu tree. These branches
are “Overview”, “Configure”, and “Service Tools”. From this screen select any of the three main
branches to access detailed device functionality.
6
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-3. Home Screen Menu Tree Main Navigation Branches
2.1.5
Overview
The overview branch of the menu tree provides device information and single keystroke
shortcuts to view variables and device status, access device diagnostics, and perform basic
calibration functions. The overview screen is the landing screen for PC based user interfaces.
Figure 2-4. Overview Section of the Menu Tree
Overview
Configure
Service Tools
(Overview)
Pressure
Calibration
Device Information
Locate Device
Scale Gauges
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
2.1.6
(Calibration)
Primary Value
Sensor Trim
Sensor Limits
Restore Factory Calibration
Last Calibration Points
Calibration Details
(Primary Value)
Change Damping
(Device Information)
Identification
Revisions
Materials of Construction
Security & Simulation
(Materials of Construction)
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Sensor Trim)
Upper
Lower
Zero
Restore
(Security & Simulation)
Write Lock Setup
(Revisions)
Device Driver
Configure
Figure 2-5. Guided Setup Branch of the Menu Tree
(Configure)
Guided Setup
Manual Setup
Alert Setup
(Guided Setup)
Zero Trim
Change Damping
Local Display Setup
Configure Analog Input Blocks
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
The Configure branch of the menu tree provides both guided setup and manual setup. Guided
setup provides automated step by step methods for performing device configuration. Manual
setup provides user editable screens where the user can perform a configuration task by
selecting or entering the necessary parameters without step by step guidance.
Figure 2-6. Manual Setup Branch of the Menu Tree
(Manual Setup)
Process Variable
Materials of Construction
Analog Input Blocks Configuration
Display
Classic View
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
Configuration
(Materials of Construction)
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Display)
Display Options
Advanced Configuration
(Process Variable)
Pressure
Pressure Damping
Sensor Temperature
Configure Analog Input Blocks
Change Damping
(Advanced Configuration)
Display Parameter 1
Display Parameter 2
Display Parameter 3
Display Parameter 4
7
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Manual Setup can take less time than guided setup if the user is familiar with the task to be
performed. Manual Setup also allows users to edit specific parameters without needing to step
through all the setup steps. If the user is not familiar with a specific task, Guided Setup is
recommended so task steps are done in the correct order and all needed steps are performed.
Figure 2-7. Classic View of the Menu Tree
(View All Parameters)
Resource Block
Sensor Transducer Block
LCD Block
(Classic View)
View All Parameters
Mode Summary
Master Reset
(Mode Summary)
Return All to Service
Put All Out of Service
Resource Block – Mode Change
Sensor Transducer Block – Mode Change
LCD Block Mode Change
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
The Manual Setup branch also provides a view called ‘classic view’ which lists block parameters
in a single scroll-down menu. Expert users may prefer this view for configuration as multiple
configuration tasks can be performed without leaving the single menu screen.
Figure 2-8. Alert Setup Branch of the Menu Tree
(Alert Setup)
Device Alerts
Process Alerts
Diagnostic Alerts
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
(Device Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Device Alerts
(Suppressed Device Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
(Process Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Process Alerts
(Suppressed Process Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
(Diagnostic Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Device Alerts
(Suppressed Diagnostic Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
The final Configure branch supports alert setup of NE107 alerts (The factory default Device
Alerts), or PlantWeb® Alerts. Note that the diagnostics performed and the recommended
actions for NE107 Alerts and PlantWeb Alerts are identical. The only difference is that NE107
alerts and PlantWeb Alerts annunciate the alerts using different categories.
NE107 requires device manufacturers to provide a way for users to enable, suppress, and
re-categorize alerts. The Rosemount 2051 organizes alerts as “Device Alerts”, “Process Alerts”,
or “Diagnostic Alerts”. NE107 alerts can be defined as any of four categories. They are “Failure
Alerts”, Out of Specification Alerts”, Maintenance Required Alerts”, and “Function Check
Alerts”. To minimize configuration tasks and time, the Rosemount 2051 ships from the factory
with alerts enabled and pre-categorized. The use of factory default categories is recommended
if the defaults meet plant standards, and there is no identified benefit to changing categories.
Note
The NE107 specification allows a single alert to be included in multiple categories. As a general
practice this is not recommended as alarm management can become needlessly complex.
8
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
NE107 alerts can be suppressed. If an alert is configured to reside in multiple categories, it can
be suppressed in some categories, but not others. To completely suppress an alert it must be
suppressed in every category where it is configured.
2.1.7
Service Tools
Figure 2-9. Service Tools
(Service Tools)
Alerts
Variables
Trends
Maintenance
Simulate
(Variables)
Pressure
Sensor Temperature
(Trends)
Pressure
Sensor Temperature
(Simulate)
Simulate Alerts
Enable / Disable Alert Simulations
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
(Maintenance)
Calibrate
Reset / Restore
(Reset / Restore)
Master Reset
Restore Factory Cal
(Calibrate)
Primary Value
Pressure Unit Conversion
Change Damping
Sensor Trim
Upper / Lower / Zero
Restore
Sensor Limits
Last Calibration Point
Calibration Details
The Service Tools branch of the menu tree allows users to perform typical device maintenance
tasks, simulate alerts and parameters, and perform some configuration resets to return devices
to as-manufactured settings.
Configuration
9
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-10. Complete Menu Tree
Overview
Configure
Service Tools
(Overview)
Pressure
Calibration
Device Information
Locate Device
Scale Gauges
(Configure)
Guided Setup
Manual Setup
Alert Setup
(Manual Setup)
Process Variable
Materials of Construction
Display
Classic View
(Calibration)
Primary Value
Sensor Trim
Sensor Limits
Restore Factory Calibration
Last Calibration Points
Calibration Details
(Primary Value)
Pressure Unit Conversion
Change Damping
(Device Information)
Identification
Revisions
Materials of Construction
Security & Simulation
(Materials of Construction)
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Guided Setup)
Zero Trim
Change Damping
Local Display Setup
Configure Analog Input Blocks
(Process Variable)
Pressure
Pressure Damping
Sensor Temperature
Configure Analog Input Blocks
Change Damping
10
(Revisions)
Device Driver
(Advanced Configuration)
Display Parameter 1
Display Parameter 2
Display Parameter 3
Display Parameter 4
(Mode Summary)
Return All to Service
Put All Out of Service
Resource Block – Mode Change
Sensor Transducer Block – Mode Change
LCD Block Mode Change
(Classic View)
View All Parameters
Mode Summary
Master Reset
(View All Parameters)
Resource Block
Sensor Transducer Block
LCD Block
(Alert Setup)
Device Alerts
Process Alerts
Diagnostic Alerts
PlantWeb Alerts
(Device Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Device Alerts
(Suppressed Device Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
(Process Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Process Alerts
(Suppressed Process Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
(PlantWeb Alert Setup)
Failed Suppression
Maintenance Suppression
Advisory Suppression
(Diagnostic Alerts)
Enable Failure Alerts
Enable Out of Specification Alerts
Enable Maintenance Required Alerts
Enable Function Check Alerts
Suppressed Device Alerts
(Suppressed Diagnostic Alerts)
Failure Alerts
Out of Specification Alerts
Maintenance Required Alerts
Function Check Alerts
(Variables)
Pressure
Sensor Temperature
(Trends)
Pressure
Sensor Temperature
(Simulate)
Simulate Alerts
Enable / Disable Alert Simulations
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
(Security & Simulation)
Write Lock Setup
(Materials of Construction)
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Display)
Display Options
Advanced Configuration
(Service Tools)
Alerts
Variables
Trends
Maintenance
Simulate
(Sensor Trim)
Upper
Lower
Zero
Restore
(Maintenance)
Calibrate
Reset / Restore
(Reset / Restore)
Master Reset
Restore Factory Cal
(Calibrate)
Primary Value
Pressure Unit Conversion
Change Damping
Sensor Trim
Upper / Lower / Zero
Restore
Sensor Limits
Last Calibration Point
Calibration Details
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-11. Partial Menu Tree
(Overview)
Pressure
Calibration
Device Information
Locate Device
Scale Gauges
(Calibration)
Primary Value
Sensor Trim
Sensor Limits
Restore Factory Calibration
Last Calibration Points
Calibration Details
(Device Information)
Identification (1)
Revisions
Materials of Construction
Security & Simulation
(Materials of Construction)
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Security & Simulation)
Write Lock Setup (2, 10)
(Configure)
Guided Setup
Manual Setup
Alert Setup
(Guided Setup)
Zero Trim
Change Damping (7. 9)
Local Display Setup (8, 9)
Configure Analog Input Blocks (3, 4, 5, 6,9)
(Manual Setup)
Process Variable
Materials of Construction
Display
Classic View
(Process Variable)
Pressure
Pressure Damping
Sensor Temperature
Change Damping (8, 10)
(Display)
Display Options (8, 9)
Advanced Configuration
(Classic View) (9)
View All Parameters
Mode Summary
AI Blocks Channel Mapping
Master Reset
Black Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu
screen to access this screen
Green Text – Automated methods
Red Text – Configuration task numbers from
configuration flow chart
Note that some tasks can be performed from multiple locations on the menu tree. This is done
to allow users to perform related tasks with a minimum of screen changes and keystrokes. The
organization of the device menu tree is further described below.
2.1.8
Navigation
Navigation is performed by clicking on the navigation button labeled with the task the user
wishes to perform. This takes the user to the next navigation screen, or the screen where the
desired function is performed, or launches a guided configuration automated procedure.
Configuration
11
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Note that some tasks can be performed from several different locations in the menu tree. For
example, a “Sensor Zero Trim” can be performed from the “Overview” branch, the “Configure,
Guided Setup” branch, or the “Service Tools” branch. This allows users to perform multiple tasks
while minimizing the total navigation required to access and use the desired functions.
Guided setup with automated task procedures (methods)
Guided Setup provides automated task procedures for tasks which require multiple steps to
perform. Guided setup also provides notification of recommended actions such as suggesting
the device user contact control room personnel to have the process loop placed in manual mode
prior to configuration.
Guided Setup will generally proceed in three stages. The first is preparation. In this stage user
notifications are given, and steps needed to prepare the device for task setup are performed.
The second is task execution where the task is performed in a series of steps. Sometimes the
number and sequence of steps is changed based on the values or parameters selected. This
eliminates the need for the user to understand and track how each configuration choice may
influence what can be done in succeeding steps. The third task is post-setup processing. In this
step actions needed to return the device to operation, or gracefully cancel a task are performed.
Guided setup handles mode management as part of preparation and post processing. This
means blocks that must be placed in manual or out of service mode for configuration will be
placed in those modes, and upon completion of the configuration task, will return those blocks
to the normal operating mode.
Guided setup will help the user complete tasks with the highest probability of success, and
gracefully terminate partially completed tasks by returning device parameters to the values that
existed before the terminated task was started. Users who are not very familiar with a device
should consider using Guided Configuration first.
Manual setup with manual and automated task procedures
Manual Setup should be used by users who are familiar with the mode changes and
configuration steps needed to complete a task and properly return the device to service. Manual
Setup is also sometimes used where a single parameter needs to be changed, and the user
doesn’t want to execute the full sequence of steps that are part of Guided Configuration.
Manual Setup can sometimes be performed in less time than Guided Setup, however Manual
Setup doesn’t provide the comprehensive guidance or graceful task termination of Guided
Setup. Users who are very familiar with tasks and wish to perform them in the least time should
consider using Manual Setup.
2.1.9
Classic View
Classic View provides an alternate way to view parameters and perform manual setup. In the
Classic View, the individual screens used for Manual Setup are replaced by a single scrollable list
of parameters. The Classic View reduces screen to screen navigation to a minimum, but requires
that the user know all the parameters which need to be used, and the order of those
parameters, to perform each task. The user also needs to know how to manage modes, both to
perform tasks, and to return devices to operation.
Expert users will use Classic View to review all block parameters, and to perform some
configuration or service tasks. Classic View is NOT recommended for anyone who is not a device
and FOUNDATION fieldbus expert.
12
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Control function block configuration
The 2051 uses standard control function blocks. Configuration of these function blocks, and
linking them into control strategies is performed on the control host using the configuration
screens and tools specific to that control host. To configure control function blocks and use
those in control strategies consult your control host users’ documentation.
The 2051 device configuration tools support configuration of Analog Input Blocks as needed to
select the channel and perform signal conditioning and scaling. The 2051 ships from the factory
with Analog Input Block 1 linked to the Primary Variable of the transducer block, and scheduled
to run. This is necessary to configure signal conditioning and scaling. The user is encouraged to
use Analog Input Block 1 for the Primary Variable when configuring control strategies.
2.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
Before connecting a field communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the
instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.

In an explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.

Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.

Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.

2.2.1
Confirm correct device driver
Verify the latest Device Driver (DD/DTM) is loaded on your systems to ensure proper
communications.

1.
Download the latest DD at www.emersonprocess.com or www.fieldbus.org.
2. In the Browse by Member dropdown menu, select Rosemount business unit of Emerson
Process Management.
3. Select desired product.
a.
Configuration
Within Table 2-1, use the Device Revision numbers to find the correct Device Driver.
13
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table 2-1. Rosemount 2051 FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revisions and Files
Device
revision(1) Host
2
Device driver (DD)(2) Obtain at
All
DD4: DD Rev 1
www.fieldbus.org
All
DD5: DD Rev 1
www.fieldbus.org
Emerson
AMS V 10.5 or higher:
DD Rev 2
www.emersonprocess.com
Emerson
AMS V 8 to 10.5:
DD Rev 1
www.emersonprocess.com
Emerson
375 / 475: DD Rev 2
All
DD4: DD Rev 4
All
1
DD5: NA
Device driver (DTM)
Manual document
number
www.emersonprocess.com
00809-0200-4101
Rev. BA or newer
www.emersonprocess.com
00809-0200-4101
Rev. AA
www.fieldcommunicator.com
www.fieldbus.org
N/A
Emerson
AMS Rev 8 or higher:
DD Rev 2
www.emersonprocess.com
Emerson
375 / 475: DD Rev 2
www.fieldcommunicator.com
(1) FOUNDATION fieldbus device revision can be read using a FOUNDATION fieldbus capable configuration tool.
(2) Device driver file names use device and DD revision. To access functionality, the correct device driver must be installed on your control and asset
management hosts, and on your configuration tools.
2.3
Device capabilities
2.3.1
Link active scheduler
The Rosemount 2051 can be designated to act as the backup Link Active Scheduler (LAS) in the
event that the LAS is disconnected from the segment. As the backup LAS, the 2051 will take
over the management of communications until the host is restored.
The host system may provide a configuration tool specifically designed to designate a particular
device as a backup LAS.
2.3.2
Capabilities
Virtual Communication Relationship (VCRs)
There are a total of 20 VCRs. Two are permanent and 18 are fully configurable by the host
system. Twenty-five link objects are available.
14
Network parameter
Value
Slot Time
Maximum Response Delay
Maximum Inactivity to Claim LAS Delay
Minimum Inter DLPDU Delay
Time Sync class
Maximum Scheduling Overhead
Per CLPDU PhL Overhead
Maximum Inter-channel Signal Skew
Required Number of Post-transmission-gab-ext Units
Required Number of Preamble-extension Units
6
4
47
7
4 (1ms)
21
4
0
0
1
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Host timer recommendations
T1 = 96000
T2 = 9600000
T3 = 480000
Table 2-2. Block Execution Times
Block
Time (in ms)
Analog Input
PID
Arithmetic
Input Selection
Signal Characterizer
Integrator
Output Splitter
Control Selector
2.4
20
25
20
20
20
20
20
20
Node address
The transmitter is shipped at a temporary (248) address. This enables FOUNDATION fieldbus host
systems to automatically recognize the device and move it to a permanent address.
2.5
General block information
2.5.1
FOUNDATION fieldbus function blocks
Reference information on the process control function blocks can be found in the Function Block
manual document number 00809-0100-4783.
Resource block
The Resource block contains diagnostic, hardware and electronics information. There are no
linkable inputs or outputs to the Resource Block.
Sensor transducer block
The Sensor Transducer Block contains sensor information including the sensor diagnostics and
the ability to trim the pressure sensor or recall factory calibration.
LCD display transducer block
The LCD Display Transducer Block is used to configure the LCD display meter.
Analog input block
The Analog Input (AI) Function Block processes the measurements from the sensor and makes
them available to other function blocks. The output value from the AI block is in engineering
units and contains a status indicating the quality of the measurement. The AI block is widely
used for scaling functionality.
Configuration
15
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Note
The channel, Set XD_Scale, Set L_Type, and sometimes Set Out_Scale are typically configured
by instrument personnel. Other AI block parameters, block links, and schedule are typically
configured by the control systems configuration engineer.
Input selector block
The Input Selector (ISEL) Function Block can be used to select the first good, Hot Backup™,
maximum, minimum, or average of as many as eight input values and place it at the output. The
block supports signal status propagation.
Integrator block
The Integrator (INT) Function Block integrates one or two variables over time. The block
compares the integrated or accumulated value to pre-trip and trip limits and generates discrete
output signals when the limits are reached.
The Integrator Block is used as a totalizer. This block will accept up to two inputs, has six options
how to totalize the inputs, and two trip outputs.
Arithmetic block
The Arithmetic (ARTH) Function Block provides the ability to configure a range extension
function for a primary input. It can also be used to compute nine different arithmetic functions
including flow with partial density compensation, electronic remote seals, hydrostatic tank
gauging, ratio control and others.
Signal characterizer block
The Signal Characterizer (SGCR) Function Block characterizes or approximates any function that
defines an input/output relationship. The function is defined by configuring as many as twenty
X,Y coordinates. The block interpolates an output value for a given input value using the curve
defined by the configured coordinates. Two separate analog input signals can be processed
simultaneously to give two corresponding separate output values using the same defined curve.
PID block
The PID Function Block combines all of the necessary logic to perform proportional/integral/derivative (PID) control. The block supports mode control, signal scaling and limiting, feed
forward control, override tracking, alarm limit detection, and signal status propagation.
The block supports two forms of the PID equation: Standard and Series. You can choose the
appropriate equation using the MATHFORM parameter. The Standard ISA PID equation is the
default selection.
Control selector block
The Control Selector (CSEL) Function Block selects one of two or three inputs to be the output.
The inputs are normally connected to the outputs of PID or other function blocks. One of the
inputs would be considered Normal and the other two overrides.
16
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Output splitter block
The Output Splitter (OSPL) Function Block provides the capability to drive two control outputs
from a single input. It takes the output of one PID or other control block to control two valves or
other actuators.
Index numbers
Table 2-3. Block Index Numbers
Block name
Resource Block
Sensor Transducer Block
Display Transducer Block
Analog Input Block
PID Block
Input Selector Block
Signal Characterizer Block
Arithmetic Block
Integrator Block
Control Selector Block
Output Splitter Block
Revision 1
Revision 2
1000
1100
1200
1400, 1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
N/A
N/A
1000
1100
1200
1400, 1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
Function Blocks with default block index numbers up to 1500 are permanent. Function Blocks
with default block indexes 1600 and higher are instantiated and can be deleted by the user.
2.5.2
Modes
The Resource, Transducer, and all function blocks in the device have modes of operation. These
modes govern the operation of the block. Every block supports both automatic (AUTO) and out
of service (OOS) modes. Other modes may also be supported.
Changing modes
To change the operating mode, set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to the desired mode. After a short
delay, the parameter MODE_BLK.ACTUAL should reflect the mode change if the block is
operating properly. Appropriate resource, transducer, and Analog Input block mode changes
are made by the automated procedures (Methods) for most configuration tasks.
Permitted modes
It is possible to prevent unauthorized changes to the operating mode of a block. To do this,
configure MODE_BLK.PERMITTED to allow only the desired operating modes. It is
recommended to always select OOS as one of the permitted modes.
Types of modes
For the procedures described in this manual, it will be helpful to understand the following
modes:
Configuration
17
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
AUTO
The functions performed by the block will execute. If the block has any outputs, these will
continue to update. This is typically the normal operating mode.
Out of Service (OOS)
The functions performed by the block will not execute. If the block has any outputs, these will
typically not update and the status of any values passed to downstream blocks will be “BAD”. To
make some changes to the configuration of the block, change the mode of the block to OOS.
When the changes are complete, change the mode back to AUTO.
MAN
In this mode, variables that are passed out of the block can be manually set for testing or
override purposes.
Other types of modes
Other types of modes are Cas, RCas, ROut, IMan and LO. Some of these may be supported by
different function blocks in the Rosemount 2051. For more information, see the Function Block
manual, document 00809-0100-4783.
Mode propagation
Note
When an upstream block is set to OOS, this will impact the output status of all downstream
blocks. The figure below depicts the hierarchy of blocks:
Resource Block
2.5.3
Transducer
Block
Analog Input
(AI Block)
Other
function
blocks
Block instantiation
The Rosemount 2051 supports the use of Function Block Instantiation. When a device supports
block instantiation, the number of blocks and block types can be defined to match specific
application needs.The number of blocks that can be instantiated is only limited by the amount
of memory within the device and the block types that are supported by the device. Instantiation
does not apply to standard device blocks like the Resource, Sensor Transducer, and LCD Display
Transducer Blocks.
Block instantiation is done by the host control system or configuration tool, but not all hosts are
required to implement this functionality. Please refer to your specific host or configuration tool
manual for more information.
2.5.4
Simulation
Simulation is the functionality of the AI block. There are two ways to simulate values as follows:
18
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
1.
October 2014
Change the mode of the block to manual and adjust the output value.
2. Enable simulation through the configuration tool and manually enter a value for the
measurement value and its status (this single value will apply to all outputs).
In both cases, first set the ENABLE switch on the field device.
With simulation enabled, the actual measurement value has no impact on the OUT value or the
status. The OUT values will all have the same value as determined by the simulate value.
2.6
Resource block
2.6.1
FEATURES and FEATURES_SEL
The FEATURES parameter is read only and defines which host accessible features are supported
by the 2051. Below is a list of the FEATURES the 2051 supports. See Appendix A: Specifications
and Reference Data for the complete list.
Reference the feature list in the parameter table in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference
Data .
FEATURES_SEL is used to turn on any of the supported features that are found in the FEATURES
parameter. The default setting of the Rosemount 2051 does not select any of these features.
Choose one or more of the supported features if any.
UNICODE
All configurable string variables in the 2051, except tag names, are octet strings. Either ASCII or
Unicode may be used. If the configuration device is generating Unicode octet strings, you must
set the Unicode option bit.
REPORTS
The 2051 supports alert reports. The Reports option bit must be set in the features bit string to
use this feature. If it is not set, the host must poll for alerts. If this bit is set, the transmitter will
actively report alerts.
SOFT W LOCK and HARD W LOCK
Inputs to the security and write lock functions include the hardware security switch, the
hardware and software write lock bits of the FEATURE_SEL parameter, and the WRITE_LOCK
parameter.
The WRITE_LOCK parameter prevents modification of parameters within the device except to
clear the WRITE_LOCK parameter. During this time, the block will function normally updating
inputs and outputs and executing algorithms. When the WRITE_LOCK condition is cleared, a
WRITE_ALM alert is generated with a priority that corresponds to the WRITE_PRI parameter.
The FEATURE_SEL parameter enables the user to select any one of the following: a hardware
write lock, a software write lock, or no write lock capability. To enable the hardware security
function, enable the HARD W LOCK bit in the FEATURE_SEL parameter. When this bit has been
enabled the WRITE_LOCK parameter becomes read only and will reflect the state of the
Configuration
19
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
hardware switch. In order to enable the software write lock, place the hardware write lock
switch in the unlocked position. Then the SOFT W LOCK bit must be set in the FEATURE_SEL
parameter. Once this bit is set, the WRITE_LOCK parameter may be set to “Locked” or “Not
Locked.” Once the WRITE_LOCK parameter is set to “Locked” by either the software or the
hardware lock, all user requested writes shall be rejected.
2.6.2
MAX_NOTIFY
The MAX_NOTIFY parameter value of 7 is the maximum number of alert reports that the
resource can have sent without getting a confirmation from the host, corresponding to the
amount of buffer space available for alert messages. The number can be set lower, to control
alert flooding, by adjusting the LIM_NOTIFY parameter value. If LIM_NOTIFY is set to zero, then
no alerts are reported.
2.6.3
Alerts/alarms
Note
See “Damping” on page 38 for Alert Configuration.
The 2051 Rev 2 pressure transmitter supports both PlantWeb Alerts and NE107 alerts. All alerts
are configured, masked, and mapped as NE 107 Status Signals. If the control host is DeltaV
version 11.5 or older alerts are automatically annunciated as PlantWeb Alerts. No user
configuration is needed for this conversion.
The alerts and recommended actions should be used in conjunction with Section 6: Troubleshooting. See “Resource block” on page 97for more information on resource block parameters.
The Resource Block will act as a coordinator for alerts. Depending on user configuration each
device will have either three or four alert Parameters. If PlantWeb alerts are configured, the
three alert parameters will be (FAILED_ALARM, MAINT_ALARM, and ADVISE_ALARM). If NE107
alerts are configured the four alert parameters will be (FD_FAIL_ACTIVE, FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE,
FD_MAINT_ACTIVE, and FD_CHECK_ACTIVE).
Note
NE107 alerts and PlantWeb Alerts annunciate the same diagnostics and display the same
recommended actions. The only difference in the alerts reported is the parameters used to
annunciate the alert conditions. The default factory configuration has NE107 alerts enabled.
Alerts processing within the device
1.
Diagnostics perform comprehensive checks and update status within the device. These
status conditions allow the user to troubleshoot probable causes and take corrective
actions.
2. The status conditions are then mapped into four status signals that can be used for
annunciation on the segment to the host.
3. Before annunciation a check is made to determine if the user has masked any alert
parameters. Any masked parameters will not be annunciated to the host, but will be visible
using the device DD or DTM.
4. Unmasked alert conditions are annunciated by the appropriate status signal to the host.
20
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
PlantWeb Alerts and NE107 alerts are both processed using the steps described above, and
annunciate the same consolidated status parameters.
Figure 2-12. NE107 Alert Processing Diagram
Detailed Status
User Actionable
Consolidated Status
Mapping of Status
Conditions to Status
Signals
Masking of Alert Parameters
by Status Signal
Alert Conditions reported to host
as NE 107 Status Signals or
PlantWeb Alerts
Sensor Status condition 1
Extended Sensor Status
condition
“Sensor Failure”
Sensor Failure
FD _FAIL _MAP
Electronics Failure
Sensor Status condition N
Electronics Status condition
1
Extended Electronics
Status condition
“Electronics Failure”
FD _MAINT _MAP
FD _MAINT _MASK
Electronics Status condition
N
Additional Status
conditions
1. Detailed status includes
conditions found by all
diagnostics the device
runs.
Detailed status for
NE 107 and PlantWeb
alerts are identical.
2. Consolidated status
groups diagnostics by
probable cause and
corrective action.
Consolidated status for
NE 107 and PlantWeb
alerts are identical.
Additional Status
Signals Mapped
3. Mapping of conditions
defines how conditions will
be reported. NE 107
mapping can be user
modified.
Additional Alert Conditions
4. Masking of conditions
within each status signal
determines which
conditions are reported to
the host and which are not
by status signal. All
diagnostic conditions and
status signals remain
visible within the device.
5. Unmasked active
conditions are reported to
the host. The unmasked
conditions are reported by
status signal categories
or PlantWeb Alert
categories.
Figure 2-13. NE 107 Status Signal to PlantWeb Alert Mapping
NE 107 Status Signal
PlantWeb Alert
FD _FAIL
FAILED
FD _OFFSPEC
MAINT
FD _MAINT
ADVISE
FD _CHECK
The alert priority enumeration value
Alerts have priorities that determine if they occur, and where and how they are annunciated.
NE107 Status Signals and PlantWeb Alerts use the same priorities and annunciate the same
ways.
Configuration
21
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
0 = Alerts will not occur. If there is an existing alert and the priority is changed from a number
greater than zero to zero the alert will clear. Active device diagnostics are still shown within the
Device Description even if the alert has been cleared.
1 = The associated alert is not sent as a notification. If the priority is above 1, then the alert must
be reported.
2 = Reserved for alerts that do not require the attention of a plant operator, e.g. diagnostic and
system alerts. Block alert, error alert, and update event have a fixed priority of 2.
3-7 = Increasing higher priorities - advisory alerts.
8-15 = Increasing higher priority - critical alerts.
NE107 alerts overview
NE107 alert parameters
NE107 has four alert parameters. They are in order from highest to lowest priority:
1.
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
2. FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
3. FD_MAINT_ACTIVE
4. FD_CHECK_ACTIVE
Any of the seven alert conditions can be user configured to annunciate as any of the four alert
parameters. Individual alert conditions can also be mapped into multiple alert parameters.
Alert parameter definitions and factory defaults
Note
All seven alert conditions are factory assigned to appropriate alert parameters. Change the
parameter assignment of individual alert conditions only if needed.
Devices are shipped from the factory with all applicable alerts enabled. The factory default alert
conditions reported in each parameter are:
1.
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
a.
Incompatible module
b. Sensor failure
c.
Electronics failure
A FD_FAIL_ACTIVE alert indicates a failure within a device that will make the device or some part
of the device non-operational. This implies that the process variable may no longer be available
and the device is in need of immediate repair.
22
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
2. FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
a.
Pressure out of limits
b. Sensor temperature out of limits
A FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE alert indicates that the device is experiencing pressure or temperature
conditions that are outside the device operating range. This implies that the process variable
may no longer be accurate. It also implies that if the condition is ignored the device will
eventually fail.
3. FD_MAINT_ACTIVE
a.
Display update failure
A FD_MAINT_ACTIVE alert indicates the device is still functioning but an abnormal device
condition exists. The device should be checked to determine the type of abnormal condition
and recommended actions to resolve it.
4. FD_CHECK_ACTIVE
a.
Function check
A FD_CHECK_ACTIVE alert indicates a transducer block is not in “Auto” mode. This may be due
to configuration or maintenance activities.
Mapping alert conditions
Any of the alert conditions can be mapped into any of the NE107 alert parameters. This is done
using the following parameters.
1.
FD_FAIL_MAP assigns a condition to FD_FAIL_ACTIVE.
2. FD_OFFSPEC_MAP assigns a condition to FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE.
3. FD_MAINT_MAP assigns a condition to FD_MAINT_ACTIVE.
4. FD_CHECK_MAP assigns a condition to FD_CHECK_ACTIVE.
Masking alert conditions
Any combination of alert conditions can be masked. When a status signal is masked, it will not
be annunciated to the host system but will still be active in the device and viewable in the device
DD or DTM. The recommended action, FD_RECOMMEN_ACT will continue to show the
recommended action for the most severe condition or conditions detected as determined by
the condition priority. This allows maintenance personnel to view and correct device conditions
without annunciating the conditions to operational staff. They are masked using the following
parameters:
1.
FD_FAIL_MASK to mask FD_FAIL_ACTIVE conditions
2. FD_OFFSPEC_MASK to mask FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE conditions
3. FD_MAINT_MASK to mask FD_MAINT_ACTIVE conditions
4. FD_CHECK_MASK to mask FD_CHECK_ACTIVE conditions
Configuration
23
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
If a consolidated diagnostic condition is configured to annunciate in multiple status signal
categories it can be masked in one or several status signal categories, but left active and
annunciate in others. This provides significant flexibility but can lead to confusion when
responding to alerts. Generally alert conditions are assigned to only a single status signal.
Alert priorities
NE107 alerts can have any of 16 different condition priorities ranging from the lowest priority of
0 to the highest priority of 15. This is done using the following parameters.
1.
FD_FAIL_PRI to specify the priority of FD_FAIL_ACTIVE conditions
2. FD_OFFSPEC_PRI to specify the priority FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE conditions
3. FD_MAINT_PRI to specify the priority FD_MAINT_ACTIVE conditions
4. FD_CHECK_PRI to specify the priority FD_CHECK_ACTIVE conditions
Note
FOUNDATION fieldbus standards require that NE 107 alert priority is set to zero for all status signals
at manufacturing.
Zero priority behavior shows any active device diagnostics in the DD or DTM but alerts are not
generated based on the diagnostic conditions or published on the bus.
An alert priority of 2 or higher is required for every status signal category where status signals
are to be published on the bus.
Check with your host provider to determine the alarm priorities assigned to each status signal
category by your host. Manual configuration may be required.
DeltaV™ assigns a priority of two or higher. The priority is based on status signal category.
The status signal priority determines the behavior of both real and simulated alerts.
2.6.4
PlantWeb alerts overview
Alerts are generated, mapped, and masked as NE 107 Status Signals. If PlantWeb alerts are
required the NE 107 Status Signals are automatically converted to PlantWeb Alerts for
annunciation and display. PlantWeb alerts have three alert parameters. They are in order from
highest to lowest priority:
1.
FAILED_ALM
2. MAINT_ALM
3. ADVISE_ALM
The eight alert conditions are factory configured to annunciate as one of the three specific alert
parameters.
PlantWeb alert parameter conditions and factory defaults
Devices are shipped from the factory with all applicable alerts enabled. The alert conditions
reported in each parameter are:
1.
FAILED_ALM
a.
Incompatible module
b. Sensor failure
c.
24
Electronics failure
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A FAILED_ALM indicates a failure within a device that will make the device or some part of the
device non-operational. This implies that the process variable may no longer be available and
the device is in need of immediate repair.
2. MAINT_ALM
a.
Pressure out of limits
b. Sensor temperature out of limits
A MAINT_ALM indicates that the device is experiencing pressure or temperature conditions that
are outside the device operating range. This implies that the process variable may no longer be
accurate. It also implies that if the condition is ignored the device will eventually fail. The device
should be checked to determine the type of abnormal condition and recommended actions to
resolve it.
3. ADVISE_ALM
a.
Function check
b. Display update failure
An ADVISE_ALM indicates a transducer block is not in “Auto” mode. This may be due to
configuration or maintenance activities. It can also indicate an abnormal process or device
condition exists. The device should be checked to determine the type of abnormal condition
and recommended actions to resolve it.
PlantWeb alert priorities
PlantWeb alert priorities are configured in DeltaV. PlantWeb Alerts can have any of 16 different
condition priorities ranging from the lowest priority of 0 to the highest priority of 15. This is
done using the following parameters.
1.
FAILED_PRI to specify the priority of FAILED_ALM
2. MAINT_PRI to specify the priority of MAINT_ALM
3. ADVISE_PRI to specify the priority of ADVISE_ALM
PlantWeb alert priority is configured using DeltaV and is not part of the Device Description
functionality.
2.7
Basic device setup
Set all transmitter hardware adjustments during commissioning to avoid exposing the
transmitter electronics to the plant environment after installation.
Note
The information contained within Section 2.7-Basic device setup is the same as in the Quick
Start Guide. Reference Section 2.8-Analog Input (AI) function block through Section
2.9-Advanced device setup for more detailed configuration information.
Configuration
25
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
2.7.1
Configure
Each FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool has a different way of displaying and
performing configurations. Some use Device Descriptions (DD) or DD methods for
configuration and to display data consistently across platforms. There is no requirement that a
host or configuration tool support these features. Use the following block examples to do basic
configuration to the transmitter. For more advanced configurations, reference Section
2.8-Analog Input (AI) function block through Section 2.9-Advanced device setup in this
manual.
Note
DeltaV users should use DeltaV Explorer for the Resource and Transducer blocks and Control
Studio for the Function Blocks.
AI block quick configuration
The screens used for each step are shown in Figure 2-14, Basic Configuration Menu Tree. In
addition, step-by-step instructions for each step of AI block configuration are provided in Figure
2-14 on page 26.
Figure 2-14. Basic Configuration Menu Tree
(Overview )
Pressure
Calibration
Device Information
Locate Device
Scale Gauges
(Calibration)
Primary Value
Sensor Trim
Sensor Limits
Restore Factory Calibration
Last Calibration Points
Calibration Details
(Device Information )
Identification (1)
Revisions
Materials of Construction
Security & Simulation
(Materials of Construction )
Sensor
Sensor Range
Flange
Remote Seal
(Security & Simulation)
Write Lock Setup (2, 10)
(Configure)
Guided Setup
Manual Setup
Alert Setup
(Guided Setup )
Zero Trim
Change Damping (7, 9)
Local Display Setup (8, 9)
Configure Analog Input Blocks
(Manual Setup )
Process Variable
Materials of Construction
Display
Classic View
(3, 4, 5, 6, 9)
(Process Variable )
Pressure
Pressure Damping
Sensor Temperature
Change Damping (7, 9 )
( Display )
Display Options (8, 9)
Advanced Configuration
(Classic View ) (9)
View All Parameters
Mode Summary
AI Blocks Channel Mapping
Master Reset
Standard Text – Navigation selections available
(Text) – Name of selection used on parent menu screen to access this screen
Bold Text – Automated methods
Underlined Text -- Configuration task numbers from configuration flow chart
26
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-15. Configuration Flowchart
Start
Device Configuration
Here
1. Verify Device Tag:
PD_TAG
6. Set Low Cutoff:
LOW_CUT
2. Check Switches and
Software Write Lock
PRIMARY_VALUE_
DAMPING
3. Set Signal
Conditioning:
L_TYPE
8. Set up LCD Display
7. Set Damping:
9. Review Transmitter
Configuration
4. Set Scaling
XD_SCALE
5. Set Scaling
OUT_SCALE
10. Set Switches and
Software Write Lock
Done
Before you begin
See Figure 2-14 to graphically view the step by step process for basic device configuration.
Before beginning configuration you may need to verify the Device Tag or deactivate hardware
and software write protection on the transmitter. To do this follow Step 1 through Step b below.
Otherwise continue at “Section -AI block configuration ” below.
1.
To verify the device tag:
a.
Navigation: from the overview screen, select “Device Information” to verify the device
tag.
2. To check the switches (see Figure 2-28):
a.
The write lock switch must be in the unlocked position if the switch has been enabled in
software.
b. To disable the Software Write Lock (devices ship from the factory with the software
write lock disabled):

Navigation: from the overview screen, select “Device Information” and then select
the “Security and Simulation” tab.

Perform “Write Lock Setup” to disable Software Write Lock.
Note
Place the control loop in “Manual” mode before beginning Analog Input Block configuration.
AI block configuration
Note
Always check and reconcile function block configuration (with the exception of Resource and
Transducer blocks) after commissioning the transmitter to the control host. Function block
configuration, including AI blocks, made prior to device commissioning to the control host may
not be saved to the control host database during the commissioning process. In addition, the
control host may download configuration changes to the transmitter as part of the
commissioning process.
Configuration
27
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Note
Changes to the AI block configuration performed after the transmitter is commissioned are
typically performed using the control host configuration software. Consult your host system
documentation to see if the AI Block guided configuration method provided in the DD or DTM
should be used after the device has been commissioned.
Note
For DeltaV users, final AI block configuration and AI block configuration changes should only be
made using the DeltaV Explorer.
1.
To use guided setup:
a.
Navigate to Configure, then Guided Setup.
b. Select “AI Block Unit Setup”.
Note
Guided setup will automatically go through each step in the proper order.
Note
For convenience, AI Block 1 is pre-linked to the transmitter primary variable and should be used
for this purpose. AI Block 2 is pre-linked to the transmitter sensor temperature. The control host,
and some asset management hosts can reconfigure the factory assigned links and assign the
primary variable and sensor temperature to other AI blocks.

Channel 1 is the primary variable.

Channel 2 is the sensor temperature.
Note
Step 3 through Step 6 are all performed in a single step by step method under guided setup, or
on a single screen using manual setup.
Note
If the L_TYPE selected in Step 2 is “Direct”, Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5 are not needed. If the
L_TYPE selected is “Indirect”, Step 5 is not needed. If guided setup is used any unneeded steps
will automatically be skipped.
2. To select the Signal Conditioning “L_TYPE” from the drop down menu:
a.
Select L_TYPE: “Direct” for pressure measurements using the device default units.
b. Select L_TYPE: “Indirect” for other pressure or level units.
c.
Select L_TYPE: “Indirect Square Root” for flow units.
3. To set “XD_SCALE” to the 0% and 100% scale points (the transmitter range):
a.
Select the XD_SCALE_UNITS from the drop down menu.
b. Enter the XD_SCALE 0% point. This may be elevated or suppressed for level
applications.
c.
28
Enter the XD_SCALE 100% point. This may be elevated or suppressed for level
applications.
d. If L_TYPE is “Direct”, the AI Block may be placed in AUTO mode to return the device to
service. Guided Setup does this automatically.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
4. If L_TYPE is “Indirect” or “Indirect Square Root”, set “OUT_SCALE” to change engineering
units.
a.
Select the OUT_SCALE UNITS from the drop down menu.
b. Set the OUT_SCALE low value. This may be elevated or suppressed for level
applications.
c.
Set the OUT_SCALE high value. This may be elevated or suppressed for level
applications.
d. If L_TYPE is “Indirect”, the AI Block may be placed in AUTO mode to return the device to
service. Guided Setup does this automatically.
5. If L_TYPE is “Indirect Square Root”, a “LOW FLOW CUTOFF” function is available.
a.
Enable LOW FLOW CUTOFF.
b. Set the LOW_CUT VALUE in XD_SCALE UNITS.
c.
The AI Block may be placed in AUTO mode to return the device to service. Guided Setup
does this automatically.
6. Change damping.
a.
To use guided setup:

Navigate to Configure, Guided Setup, and select “Change Damping”.
Note
Guided Setup will automatically go through each step in the proper order.

Enter the desired damping value in seconds. The permitted range of values is 0.4 to
60 seconds.
b. To use manual setup:

Navigate to Configure, Manual Setup, Process Variable, and select “Change
Damping”.

Enter the desired damping value in seconds. The permitted range of values is 0.4 to
60 seconds.
7. Configure optional LCD display (if installed).
a.
To use guided setup:

Navigate to Configure, Guided Setup, and select “Local Display Setup”.
Note
Guided setup will automatically go through each step in the proper order.

Check the box next to each parameter to be displayed to a maximum of four
parameters. The LCD display will continuously scroll through the selected
parameters.
b. To use manual setup:
Configuration

Navigate to Configure, Manual Setup, and select “Local Display Setup”.

Check each parameter to be displayed. The LCD display will continuously scroll
through the selected parameters.
29
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
8. Review transmitter configuration and place in service.
a.
To review the transmitter configuration navigate using the manual setup navigation
sequences for “AI Block Unit Setup”, “Change Damping”, and “Set up LCD Display”.
b. Change any values as necessary.
c.
Return to the “Overview” screen.
d. If Mode is “Not in Service”, click on the “Change” button, and then click on “Return All
to Service”.
Note
If hardware or software write protection is not needed, Step 9 can be skipped.
9. Set switches and software write lock.
a.
Check switches (see Figure 4-2).
Note
The write lock switch can be left in the locked or unlocked position. The simulate enable/disable
switch may be in either position for normal device operation.
Enable software write lock
1.
Navigate from the overview screen.
a.
Select “Device Information”.
b. Select the “Security and Simulation” tab.
2. Perform “Write Lock Setup” to enable Software Write Lock.
2.8
Analog Input (AI) function block
2.8.1
Configure the AI block
Note
Always check and reconcile function block configuration (with the exception of Resource and
Transducer blocks) after commissioning the transmitter to the control host. unction block
configuration, including AI blocks, made prior to device commissioning to the control host may
not be saved to the control host database during the commissioning process. In addition, the
control host may download configuration changes to the transmitter as part of the
commissioning process.
Note
Changes to the AI block configuration performed after the transmitter is commissioned are
typically performed using the control host configuration software. Consult your host system
documentation to see if the AI Block guided configuration method provided in the DD or DTM
should be used after the device has been commissioned.
30
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Note
For DeltaV users, final AI block configuration and AI block configuration changes should only be
made using the DeltaV Explorer.
A minimum of four parameters are required to configure the AI Block. The parameters are
described below with example configurations shown at the end of this section.
CHANNEL
Select the channel that corresponds to the desired sensor measurement. The 2051 measures
both pressure (channel 1) and sensor temperature (channel 2).
Table 2-4. I/O Channel Definitions
Channel number
Channel description
1
2
Pressure in AI.XD_SCALE units
Sensor temperature in AI.XD_SCALE units
L_TYPE
The L_TYPE parameter defines the relationship of the sensor measurement (pressure or sensor
temperature) to the desired output of the AI Block (e.g. pressure, level, flow, etc.). The
relationship can be direct, indirect, or indirect square root.
Direct
Select direct when the desired output will be the same as the sensor measurement (pressure or
sensor temperature).
Indirect
Select indirect when the desired output is a calculated measurement based on the sensor
measurement (e.g. a pressure measurement is made to determine level in a tank). The
relationship between the sensor measurement and the calculated measurement will be linear.
Indirect square root
Select indirect square root when the desired output is an inferred measurement based on the
sensor measurement and the relationship between the sensor measurement and the inferred
measurement is square root (e.g. flow).
XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE
The XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE each include three parameters: 0%, 100%, and, engineering
units. Set these based on the L_TYPE:
L_TYPE is direct
When the desired output is the measured variable, set the XD_SCALE to the “Primary_Value_Range”. This is found in the Sensor Transducer Block. Set OUT_SCALE to match XD_SCALE.
L_TYPE is indirect
When an inferred measurement is made based on the sensor measurement, set the XD_SCALE
to represent the operating range that the sensor will see in the process. Determine the inferred
measurement values that correspond to the XD_SCALE 0 and 100% points and set these for the
OUT_SCALE.
Configuration
31
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
L_TYPE is indirect square root
When an inferred measurement is made based on the sensor measurement AND the
relationship between the inferred measurement and sensor measurement is square root, set the
XD_SCALE to represent the operating range that the sensor will see in the process. Determine
the inferred measurement values that correspond to the XD_SCALE 0 and 100% points and set
these for the OUT_SCALE.
Parameters
Enter data
Channel
1=Pressure, 2=Sensor Temp
L-Type
Direct, Indirect, or Square Root
XD_Scale
Scale and Engineering Units
Pa
Note
Select only the
units that are
supported by the
device.
Out_Scale
bar
torr @ 0 °C
2
ft H20 @ 4°C
m H20 @ 4 °C
kPa
mbar
kg/cm
ft H20 @ 60 °F
mm Hg @ 0 °C
mPa
psf
kg/m2
ft H20 @ 68 °F
cm Hg @ 0 °C
hPa
Atm
in H20 @ 4°C
mm H20 @ 4 °C
in Hg @ 0 °C
Deg
C
psi
in H20 @ 60 °F
mm H20 @ 68 °C
m Hg @ 0 °C
Deg F
g/cm2
in H20 @ 68 °F
cm H20 @ 4 °C
Scale and Engineering Units
Note
When the engineering units of the XD_SCALE are selected, this causes the engineering units of
the PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE in the Transducer Block to change to the same units. THIS IS THE
ONLY WAY TO CHANGE THE ENGINEERING UNITS IN THE SENSOR TRANSDUCER BLOCK,
PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE parameter.
Configuration examples
Pressure transmitter
Situation #1
A pressure transmitter with a range of 0 – 100 psi.
Solution
Table 2-5 lists the appropriate configuration settings.
Table 2-5. Analog Input function block configuration for a typical pressure transmitter
32
Parameter
Configured values
L_TYPE
XD_SCALE
OUT_SCALE
Channel
Direct
Primary_Value_Range
Primary_Value_Range
1 - pressure
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Pressure transmitter used to measure level in an open tank
Situation #2
The level of an open tank is to be measured using a pressure tap at the bottom of the tank. The
maximum level at the tank is 16 ft. The liquid in the tank has a density that makes the maximum
level correspond to a pressure of 7.0 psi at the pressure tap (see Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-16. Situation #2 Diagram
Full Tank
16 ft
7.0 psi measured at
the transmitter
Solution to Situation #2
The table below lists the appropriate configuration settings.
Analog Input function block configuration for a pressure transmitter used in level measurement
(situation #1).
Parameter
Configured values
L_TYPE
XD_SCALE
OUT_SCALE
Channel
Indirect
0 to 7 psi
0 to 16 ft
1 - pressure
Output calculation for Situation #2
When the L_Type is configured as Indirect, the OUT parameter
is calculated as:
OUT =
PV – XD_SCALE_0%
* (OUT_SCALE_100% – OUT_SCALE_0%) + OUT_SCALE_0%
XD_SCALE_100% – XD_SCALE_0%
In this example, when PV is 5 psi, then the OUT parameter will be calculated as follows:
OUT = 5 psi – 0 psi
7 psi – 0 psi
Configuration
* (16 ft. – 0 ft.) + 0 ft. = 11.43 ft.
33
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Situation #3
The transmitter in situation #3 is installed below the tank in a position where the liquid column
in the impulse line, with an empty tank, is equivalent to 2.0 psi (see Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-17. Situation #3 Diagram
16 ft
Empty Tank
0 ft
2.0 psi measured at
the transmitter
Solution to situation #3
The table below lists the appropriate configuration settings.
Analog Input function block configuration for a pressure transmitter used in level measurement
(Situation #3).
Parameter
Configured values
L_TYPE
XD_SCALE
OUT_SCALE
Channel
Indirect
2 to 9 psi
0 to 16 ft
1 - pressure
In this example, when the PV is 4 psi, OUT will be calculated as follows:
OUT = 4 psi – 2 psi
9 psi – 2 psi
* (16 ft. – 0 ft.) + 0 ft. = 4.57 ft.
Differential pressure transmitter to measure flow
Situation #4
The liquid flow in a line is to be measured using the differential pressure across an orifice plate in
the line. Based on the orifice specification sheet, the differential pressure transmitter was
calibrated for 0 to 20 inH20 for a flow of 0 to 800 gal/min.
34
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Solution
The table below lists the appropriate configuration settings.
Out =
OUT =
Parameter
Configured values
L_TYPE
XD_SCALE
OUT_SCALE
Channel
Indirect Square Root
0 to 20 in.H2O
0 to 800 gal/min.
1 - pressure
PV – XDSCALE0
-------------------------------------------------  OUTSCALE100 – OUTSCALE0  + OUTSCALE0
XDSCALE100
8inH 2 O – 0inH 2 O
------------------------------------------------------ (800gal/min. - 0gal/min.) + 0gal/min. = 505.96gal/min.
20inH 2 O – 0inH 2 O
Filtering
The filtering feature changes the response time of the device to smooth variations in output
readings caused by rapid changes in input. Adjust the filter time constant (in seconds) using the
PV_FTIME parameter. Set the filter time constant to zero to disable the filter feature.
Figure 2-18. Analog Input PV_FTIME filtering Diagram
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
6
FIELD_VAL
Time (seconds)
PV_FTIME
Low cutoff
When the converted input value is below the limit specified by the LOW_CUT parameter, and
the Low Cutoff I/O option (IO_OPTS) is enabled (True), a value of zero is used for the converted
value (PV). This option is useful to eliminate false readings when the differential pressure
measurement is close to zero, and it may also be useful with zero-based measurement devices
such as flowmeters.
Note
Low Cutoff is the only I/O option supported by the AI block. Set the I/O option in Manual or Out
of Service mode only.
Configuration
35
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Process alarms
Process alarms are part of the process loop control strategy. They are configured in the control
host. Process alarm configuration is not included in the configuration menu tree. See your
control host documentation for information on configuration of process alarms. Process Alarm
detection is based on the OUT value. Configure the alarm limits of the following standard
alarms:

High (HI_LIM)

High high (HI_HI_LIM)

Low (LO_LIM)

Low low (LO_LO_LIM)
In order to avoid alarm chattering when the variable is oscillating around the alarm limit, an
alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the ALARM_HYS parameter. The
priority of each alarm is set in the following parameters:

HI_PRI

HI_HI_PRI

LO_PRI

LO_LO_PRI
Alarm priority
Alarms are grouped into five levels of priority:
Priority
number
0
1
2
3-7
8-15
Priority description
The alarm condition is not used.
An alarm condition with a priority of 1 is recognized by the system, but is not reported to
the operator.
An alarm condition with a priority of 2 is reported to the operator.
Alarm conditions of priority 3 to 7 are advisory alarms of increasing priority.
Alarm conditions of priority 8 to 15 are critical alarms of increasing priority.
Status options
Status Options (STATUS_OPTS) supported by the AI block are shown below:
Propagate fault forward
If the status from the sensor is Bad, Device failure or Bad, Sensor failure, propagate it to OUT
without generating an alarm. The use of these sub-status in OUT is determined by this option.
Through this option, the user may determine whether alarming (sending of an alert) will be
done by the block or propagated downstream for alarming.
Uncertain if limited
Set the output status of the Analog Input block to Uncertain if the measured or calculated value
is limited.
BAD if limited
Set the output status to Bad if the sensor is violating a high or low limit.
36
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Uncertain if Man mode
Set the output status of the Analog Input block to Uncertain if the actual mode of the block is
Man.
Note
The instrument must be in Out of Service mode to set the status option.
Advanced features
The AI Function Block provides added capability through the addition of the following
parameters:
ALARM_TYPE
ALARM_TYPE allows one or more of the process alarm conditions detected by the AI function
block to be used in setting its OUT_D parameter.
OUT_D
OUT_D is the discrete output of the AI function block based on the detection of process alarm
condition(s). This parameter may be linked to other function blocks that require a discrete input
based on the detected alarm condition.
2.9
Advanced device setup
2.9.1
Overall configuration
Configuration tasks will be listed in alphabetical order. Each task will start with navigation per
the menu tree navigation diagram, to an appropriate configuration starting screen. Next
individual configuration steps will be listed. In many cases the steps can be used for either
guided or manual configuration. Specific parameter names and valid input ranges are located in
Appendix “A”.
The summary of the sections are as follows:

Section 2.9.2-Damping

Section 2.9.3-Gauge scaling

Section 2.9.4-Local display (LCD display)

Section 2.9.5-Mode

Section 2.9.6-Alert configuration NE107 and PlantWeb

Section 2.9.7-Alert simulation

Section 2.9.8-Write lock
Note
Many configuration tasks can be initiated from more than one appropriate configuration
starting screen. This manual will describe configuration from one starting screen only. The
starting screen used in the manual should not be interpreted as the preferred starting screen.
Configuration
37
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Note
Physical layout of the parameters on the screen may be different for different configuration
tools. The parameters, parameter names, and operations performed will be consistent
regardless of screen layout.
Note
Before performing any configuration or service task contact the control room and have the loop
placed in manual mode. When configuration or service tasks are complete, contact the control
room so appropriate return to automatic control can take place.
2.9.2
Damping
Note
Damping, gauge scaling, calibration, and sensor trims are performed in the Sensor Transducer
Block. For block oriented user interfaces, configure Damping in the Sensor Transducer Block.
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Manual Setup>, <Process Variable>
Damping can be changed using the Overview, Configure, or Service Tools branches of the menu
tree. All perform the same function. The Configure branch is used here.
Navigate to the Process Variables screen and click on the ‘Change Damping’ button. An
automated task procedure called a ‘Method’ will guide the user through changing the damping.
Alternately an operator or configuration engineer can change the damping from the control
system Analog Input Block configuration screens. Consult your control system documentation
for more information.
Figure 2-19. Process Variables Screen
The ‘Change Damping’ button shown in Figure 2-19 above starts an automated procedure
called a Method which allows damping to be changed.
The sequence of steps used is:
1.
The device will be placed ‘out of service’.
2. Enter the new damping value in seconds.
3. The device will be returned to ‘Auto’ mode.
38
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
2.9.3
October 2014
Gauge scaling
Menu Navigation: <Overview>
Scale Gauges is used to change the scaling displayed on the Gauges used to view variables. From
the Overview screen, click on the ‘Scale Gauges’ button. An automated task procedure called a
‘Method’ will guide the user through scaling the Gauges.
The sequence of steps used is:
1.
Enter the desired value for the lower range of the pressure gauge.
2. Enter the desired value for the upper range of the pressure gauge.
Figure 2-20. Overview Screen
The ‘Scale Gauges’ button shown in Figure 2-20 above starts an automated procedure called a
method which allows the user to change the scaling on the gauge.
2.9.4
Local display (LCD display)
Note
Local Display setup is performed in the LCD display transducer block. For block oriented user
interfaces, perform local display configuration in the LCD display transducer block.
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Manual Setup>, <Display>
The Local Display can be configured using ‘Guided Setup’ or ‘Manual Setup’.
Basic display setup
Basic Display Setup provides a check - the - box way for the user to configure up to four
parameters to display on the LCD display. These parameters are displayed on a rotating basis.
Configuration
39
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
The sequence of steps used is:
1.
Check the box next to each parameter the LCD display should display.
2. If ‘Scaled Output’ is selected, use the ‘Pressure Scaled Unit’ dropdown menu to select units.
Figure 2-21. Local Display Basic Configuration Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-21 above allows the user to select parameters to be displayed on
the LCD display by checking the box next to each parameter. Clicking on the ‘Advanced
Configuration’ button accesses more display configuration options.
Advanced display setup
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Manual Setup>, <Display>, <Advanced Configuration>
Advanced Display Setup provides a fill in the blanks screen where the user can configure
parameters from any function block in the device to be displayed on the LCD display. Setup is a
two-step process. First, each of up to four parameters is defined. To define a parameter the user
selects the ‘Block Type’, ‘Parameter Index’, and ‘Units Type’ from dropdown menus. The user
can enter ‘Block Tag’, ‘Custom Tag’, and ‘Custom Units’.
Once all desired parameters have been defined, the second step is parameters are selected for
display by checking the box in the ‘Display Parameter Select’ area.
Figure 2-22. LCD Display Advanced Configuration Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-22 above provides the capability to define parameters for display
beyond those defined in ‘Basic Configuration’. Configuration fields for Parameters 2, 3, and 4
are provided but not shown in the image.
Note
The LCD display can be configured to display a mix of basic and advanced parameters.
40
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
2.9.5
October 2014
Mode
Note
Each block has modes. For block oriented user interfaces modes must be managed individually
in each block.
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Manual Setup>, <Classic View>, <Mode Summary>
FOUNDATION fieldbus blocks have modes. Modes propagate, so if a block is in out-of-service
mode, for example, other blocks linked to it may not function as anticipated. The 2051 DD’s and
DTM’s have automated procedures that manage transducer, resource, and analog input block
modes, placing them out of service to allow configuration, then returning them to auto mode
when the configuration task is completed or canceled. If tasks are done using manual
procedures, the user is responsible for managing modes.
The ‘Mode Summary’ function displays the active mode for all resource and transducer blocks,
and allows the user to change modes of those blocks individually, or collectively. This is most
frequently used to ‘Return All to Service’. Analog input modes are managed from the analog
input block configuration screens, or from the control host.
Figure 2-23. Mode Summary Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-23 above shows the modes of all resource and transducer blocks,
and provides a mechanism to individually or collectively take blocks out of service and return
them to automatic mode.
Configuration
41
Section 2: Configure
2.9.6
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Alert configuration NE107 and PlantWeb
The objective of alerts is to inform users of conditions of interest, and guide the user to effective
corrective actions. The Rosemount 2051 Revision 2 Pressure Transmitter with FOUNDATION
fieldbus communications provides alerts in both NE107 format and PlantWeb Alerts format. The
detailed diagnostics performed and the consolidated status which is annunciated are the same
for both NE107 and PlantWeb Alerts.
Note
Alerts are located in the Resource block. For block oriented user interfaces, configure NE107 and
PlantWeb alerts, alert suppression, and alert simulation in the Resource Block.
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Alert Setup>, <Device Alerts OR Process Alerts OR Diagnostic
Alerts OR PlantWeb Alerts>
Note
Device Alerts, Process Alerts, and Diagnostic Alerts are configured the same way. One example
will be shown.
Note
Device Alerts Suppression, Process Alerts Suppression, and Diagnostic Alerts Suppression are
configured the same way. One example will be shown.
NE107 Alerts category configuration
NE107 alerts are divided into Device Alerts, Process Alerts, or Diagnostics Alerts. Each alert type
has a dedicated configuration screen, and a dedicated Suppress Alerts screen. The Configure
Device Alerts Screen is used here. See “Alerts/alarms” on page 20 for more information on the
conditions of each. The alerts are categorized as Failure alerts, Out of Specification alerts,
Maintenance - Required alerts, and Function Check alerts. Each category contains the same list
of Device Alerts and check boxes. Alerts are assigned to a category by checking the check box
next to the alert. This activates the alert in that category. Alerts can be assigned to more than a
single category by checking the same alert check box in multiple categories. This is not
recommended as alarms can proliferate increasing the complexity of alarm management and
delaying corrective action. Use of the factory default alert categories is recommended.
Figure 2-24. Configure Device Alerts Screen
42
Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 2: Configure
October 2014
The screen shown in Figure 2-24 above is where the alerts are assigned by checking the box next
to the desired alert in the desired category.
Alerts suppression
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Alert Setup>, <Device Alerts OR Process Alerts OR Diagnostic
Alerts>
Once alerts have been configured they can be suppressed. To suppress alerts click on the
‘Suppressed Device Alerts’ button on the configuration screen. Alerts can be suppressed by
checking the check box next to the alert. This suppresses the alert in that category. Alerts can be
suppressed by category if the alert is configured to multiple categories. This allows alerts to be
selectively suppressed. To stop suppressing an alert, click on the checked box suppressing the
alert.
Figure 2-25. NE107 Suppressed Device Alerts Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-25 above is where alerts are suppressed by checking the box next
to the alert to be suppressed.
PlantWeb alerts configuration
PlantWeb alerts are automatically configured during the NE 107 alert configuration process.
There is not a separate process for configuration of PlantWeb alerts.
PlantWeb alerts suppression
Menu Navigation: <Configure>, <Alert Setup>, <PlantWeb Alerts>
There are two methods to suppress PlantWeb Alerts. The first is to assign an alert category,
Failed, Maintenance, or Advisory, a priority of 0 or 1. This will suppress all alerts in that category.
The second is to suppress individual alerts using NE 107 Alert suppression.
Configuration
43
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-26. PlantWeb Alerts Suppression Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-26 above allows categories of alerts or individual alerts to be
suppressed.
2.9.7
Alert simulation
Alert Simulation provides the capability to simulate configured NE107 or PlantWeb alerts.
NE107 Alerts and PlantWeb Alerts show the same consolidated status derived from the same
diagnostics so the single Alert Simulation is used for both. Alert Simulation is typically used for
training or to verify alert configuration.
Menu Navigation: <Service Tools>, <Simulate>
To enable alert simulation click the ‘Enable/Disable Alerts Simulation’ button. When simulate is
active it will display on the screen. Once Alerts Simulation is active individual alerts can be
simulated by checking the check box next to the desired alert condition. The device status
indication located on the upper right corner of the screen will change to show the device status
associated with the simulated alert. The simulated status will be displayed everywhere device
status is displayed. Alert Simulation is Enabled and Disabled using an automated procedure
called a ‘Method’.
Figure 2-27. Enable/Disable Alert Simulation Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-27 above enables/disables overall alert simulation capability and
allows individual alerts to be selected for simulation.
44
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configure
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
The sequence of steps to Enable Alert Simulation is:
1.
A screen displays stating ‘Alert Simulation is disabled.’
2. The screen presents the question ‘Do you want to enable alerts simulation? Below this
sentence are two radio buttons labeled ‘Yes’ and ‘No’. Select the Yes radio button.
The sequence of steps to Disable Alert Simulation is:
1.
A screen is displayed stating ‘Alert Simulation is enabled.’
2. The screen presents the question ‘Do you want to disable alerts simulation? Below this
sentence are two radio buttons labeled ‘Yes’ and ‘No’. Select the Yes radio button.
2.9.8
Write lock
Note
Write lock functions are performed in the Resource Block. For block oriented user interfaces,
perform write lock management in the Resource Block.
Menu Navigation: <Overview>, <Device Information>, <Security and Simulation>
An automated task procedure called a “Method” will guide the user through Write Lock setup.
Write lock permits users to configure, enable, and disable the various write lock options. Write
lock can be implemented as a hardware lock or a software lock. If it is implemented as a
hardware lock the position of the hardware lock switch on the 2051 electronics board will
determine if device writes are permitted. Hardware write lock is typically used to prevent writes
from a remote location. Software write lock is used to prevent local or remote writes unless the
write lock is disabled.
When the write lock procedure is initiated, it first informs the user if write lock is currently
enabled, and if it is configured as hardware or software write lock.
If Hardware write lock is enabled the physical switch on the electronics board must be set in the
unlocked position to enable changes, including changes to write lock, to be permitted.
If software write lock is enabled follow the on-screen instructions to enable changes.
The selection of the hardware or software write lock is done by clicking on the radio button next
to the desired option.
Configuration
45
Section 2: Configure
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 2-28. Security and Simulation Display Screen
The screen shown in Figure 2-28 above allows users to see if the device has simulation active, to
see if any form of write lock is active, and to configure hardware and software write lock.
46
Configuration
Section 3: Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 3
Hardware Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazardous locations certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liquid level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
page 47
page 47
page 48
page 49
page 49
page 49
page 50
page 58
page 59
page 63
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations for the Rosemount 2051 with
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus protocols. A Quick Start Guide (document number 00825-0200-4101) is
shipped with every transmitter to describe recommended pipe-fitting and wiring procedures
for initial installation. Dimensional drawings for each 2051 variation and mounting
configuration are included on “Dimensional drawings” on page 138.
Note
For transmitter disassembly and reassembly refer to “Disassembly procedures” on page 86, and
“Reassembly procedures” on page 88.
3.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated with a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Hardware Installation
47
Section 3: Hardware Installation
3.2.1
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Warnings
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.

Before connecting a HART® communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the
instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive
field wiring practices.

In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.

Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.

Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.

Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure.

Do not attempt to loosen or remove flange bolts while the transmitter is in service.
Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Emerson Process
Management for use as spare parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of
the transmitter and may render the instrument dangerous.

Use only bolts supplied or sold by Emerson Process Management as spare parts.

Refer to page 193 for a complete list of spare parts.
Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage sensor module.


3.3
For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of
flange web (i.e., bolt hole) but must not contact sensor module housing.
Considerations
Measurement accuracy depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping.
Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best
accuracy. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration,
and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock,
and temperature fluctuation.
Important
Install the enclosed pipe plug (found in the box) in unused conduit opening with a minimum of
five threads engaged to comply with explosion-proof requirements. For tapered threads, install
the plug wrench tight.
For material compatibility considerations, see document number 00816-0100-3045 on
www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount.
48
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
3.4
October 2014
Mechanical considerations
Note
For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the
transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the
blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.
Note
When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper
venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3-8 on page 56, keeping drain/vent
connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
3.5
Environmental considerations
Best practice is to mount the transmitter in an environment that has minimal ambient
temperature change. The transmitter electronics temperature operating limits are –40 to 185 °F
(–40 to 85 °C). Refer to Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data that lists the sensing
element operating limits. Mount the transmitter so that it is not susceptible to vibration and
mechanical shock and does not have external contact with corrosive materials.
3.6
Tagging
3.6.1
Commissioning tag
The 2051 has been supplied with a removable commissioning tag that contains both the Device
ID (the unique code that identifies a particular device in the absence of a device tag) and a space
to record the device tag (PD_TAG) (the operational identification for the device as defined by
the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram [P&ID]).
When commissioning more than one device on a fieldbus segment, it can be difficult to identify
which device is at a particular location. The removable tag, provided with the transmitter, can
aid in this process by linking the Device ID to its physical location. The installer should note the
physical location of the transmitter on both the upper and lower location of the commissioning
tag. The bottom portion should be torn off for each device on the segment and used for
commissioning the segment in the control system.
Figure 3-1. Commissioning Tag
Commissioning Tag
Commissioning Tag
DEVICE ID:
DEVICE ID:
0011512051010001440 -12169809172
001151AC00010001440-12169809172
DEVICE REVISION: 1.1
PHYSICAL DEVICE TAG
DEVICE ID:
0011512051010001440 -12169809172
DEVICE REVISION: 2.1
A
PHYSICAL DEVICE TAG
DEVICE ID:
001151AC00010001440-12169809172
Device Barcode
Device Barcode
DEVICE REVISION: 1.1
DEVICE REVISION: 2.1
S/N :
S/N :
PHYSICAL DEVICE TAG
PHYSICAL DEVICE TAG
A. Device revision
Hardware Installation
49
Section 3: Hardware Installation
3.6.2
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Transmitter tag
If permanent tag is ordered:

Transmitter is tagged in accordance with customer requirements

Tag is permanently attached to the transmitter
Software (PD_TAG)

If permanent tag is ordered, the PD Tag contains the permanent tag information up to
32 characters.

If permanent tag is NOT ordered, the PD Tag contains the transmitter serial number.
3.7
Installation procedures
3.7.1
Mount the transmitter
Process flange orientation
Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons,
place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact
when the vents are used. In addition, consider the accessibility for a testing or calibration input.
Note
Most transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any
other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head pressure caused
by the varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to “Trim the pressure signal” on
page 80.
Terminal side of electronics housing
Mount the transmitter so the terminal side is accessible. Clearance of 0.75-in. (19 mm) is
required for cover removal. Use a conduit plug on the unused side of the conduit opening.
Circuit side of electronics housing
Provide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units without an LCD display. Provide 3 in. (76 mm) of
clearance for units installed with LCD display.
Cover installation
Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing covers so that metal contacts
metal. Use Rosemount O-rings.
Mounting brackets
Rosemount 2051 Transmitters may be panel-mounted or pipe-mounted through an optional
mounting bracket. Refer to Table 3-1 for the complete offering and see Figure 3-2 through
Figure 3-5 on pages 51 and 52 for dimensions and mounting configurations.
50
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table 3-1. Mounting Brackets
2051 brackets
Process connections
Mounting
Materials
Traditional
Pipe
mount
Panel
mount
Flat
panel
mount
CS
bracket
X
N/A
X
X
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
B2
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
B3
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
X
N/A
B7
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
B8
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
B9
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
BA
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
BC
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
Option
code
Coplanar
In-line
B4
X
B1
SST
CS
bracket bolts
SST
bolts
Figure 3-2. Mounting Bracket Option Code B4
5
2.8 (71)
/16 3 11/2 Bolts
for Panel Mounting
(Not Supplied)
3
/8–16 × 11/4 Bolts
for Mounting
to Transmitter
3.4 (85)
Hardware Installation
51
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 3-3. Mounting Bracket Option Codes B1, B7, and BA
1.63 (41)
3.75 (95)
4.09 (104)
2.73 (69)
4.97 (126)
2.81
(71)
Figure 3-4. Panel Mounting Bracket Option Codes B2 and B8
1.63 (41)
3.75 (95)
Mounting holes
0.375 diameter
(10)
4.09 (104)
1.405
(35,7)
1.40
(36)
2.81
(71)
4.5 (114)
1.405
(35,7)
Figure 3-5. Flat Mounting Bracket Option Codes B3 and BC
2.125 (54)
1.625 (41)
8.00 (203)
2.81 (71)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
52
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Flange bolts
The 2051 is shipped with a coplanar flange installed with four 1.75-in. (44 mm) flange bolts. See
Figure 3-6 on page 54 and Figure 3-7 on page 54. Stainless steel bolts are coated with a
lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional
lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts are identified by their head
markings:
B7M
Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings
Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings
316
B8M
F593
* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may
be any letter between A and M.
Bolt installation
Only use bolts supplied with the 2051 or provided by Emerson Process Management as spare
parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque the
bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1.
Finger-tighten the bolts.
2.
Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern.
3.
Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern.
Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:
Table 3-2. Bolt Installation Torque Values
Bolt material
Initial torque value
Final torque value
CS-ASTM-A449 Standard
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
316 SST—Option L4
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8M—Option L8
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
Hardware Installation
53
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 3-6. Traditional Flange Bolt Configurations
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSMITTER
GAGE TRANSMITTER
A
B
A
A
1.75 (44) × 4
1.75 (44) × 4
1.50 (38) × 4
1.50 (38) × 2
A. Drain/vent
B. Plug
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Figure 3-7. Mounting Bolts and Bolt Configurations for Coplanar Flange
TRANSMITTER WITH FLANGE BOLTS
TRANSMITTER WITH
FLANGE ADAPTERS AND FLANGE/ADAPTER BOLTS
2.88 (73) × 4
1.75 (44) × 4
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Description
Size in inches (mm)
Flange Bolts
1.75 (44)
Flange/Adapter Bolts
2.88 (73)
Manifold/Flange Bolts
2.25 (57)
Note: Rosemount 2051T transmitters are direct mount and do not require bolts for process connection.
54
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
3.7.2
October 2014
Impulse piping
The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to
obtain accurate measurements. There are six possible sources of impulse piping error: pressure
transfer, leaks, friction loss (particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a
gas line, and density variations between the legs.
The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe is dependent on the process.
Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse
piping:

Keep impulse piping as short as possible.

For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 in./foot (8 cm/m) upward from the
transmitter toward the process connection.

For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 in./foot (8 cm/m) downward from
the transmitter toward the process connection.

Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.

Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.

Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.

Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.

When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.

When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge
through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.

Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact
with the sensor module and flanges.

Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.

Maintain equal leg of head pressure on both legs of the impulse piping.

Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
Mounting requirements
Impulse piping configurations depend on specific measurement conditions. Refer to Figure 3-8
for examples of the following mounting configurations:
Liquid flow measurement

Place taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the process isolators.

Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases vent into the process line.

Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent.
Gas flow measurement

Place taps in the top or side of the line.

Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so to drain liquid into the process line.
Hardware Installation
55
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Steam flow measurement

Place taps to the side of the line.

Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that impulse piping will remain filled
with condensate.

In steam service above 250 °F (121 °C), fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam
from contacting the transmitter directly and to ensure accurate measurement start-up.
Note
For steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the
process connection do not exceed the transmitter’s process temperature limits. See
“Temperature limits” on page 131 for details.
Figure 3-8. Installation Examples
LIQUID SERVICE
STEAM SERVICE
GAS SERVICE
w
Flo
w
Flo
Flo
w
3.7.3
Process connections
Coplanar or traditional process connection
Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure, or process leakage will result.
When properly installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module
housing. Do not attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service.
Flange adapters
Rosemount 2051DP and GP process connections on the transmitter flanges are 1/4–18 NPT.
Flange adapters are available with standard 1/2–14 NPT Class 2 connections. The flange adapters
allow users to disconnect from the process by removing the flange adapter bolts. Use
plant-approved lubricant or sealant when making the process connections. Refer to “Mount the
transmitter” on page 50 for the distance between pressure connections. This distance may be
varied ±1/8 in. (3.2 mm) by rotating one or both of the flange adapters.
To install adapters to a coplanar flange, perform the following procedure:
56
1.
Remove the flange bolts.
2.
Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed.
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
3.
Clamp the adapters and the coplanar flange to the transmitter sensor module using the
larger of the bolts supplied.
4.
Tighten the bolts. Refer to “Flange bolts” on page 53 for torque specifications.
Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace with
O-ring designed for Rosemount transmitter if there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or
cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If you replace the O-rings, retorque the flange bolts
after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body reassembly
procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting.
O-rings
The two styles of Rosemount flange adapters (Rosemount 1151 and Rosemount
3051/2051/2024/3095) each require a unique O-ring (see Figure 3-9). Use only the O-ring
designed for the corresponding flange adapter.
Figure 3-9. O-rings
Failure to install proper flange adapter O-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in
death or serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique O-ring
grooves. Only use the O-ring that is designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below.
ROSEMOUNT 3051S/3051/2051/3001/3095/2024
A
B
C
D
ROSEMOUNT 1151
A
B
C
D
A. Flange Adapter
B. O-ring
C. PTFE Based
D. Elastomer
When compressed, PTFE O-rings tend to “cold flow,” which aids in their sealing capabilities.
Note
PTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed.
Hardware Installation
57
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Inline process connection
Do not apply torque directly to the sensor module. Rotation between the sensor module
and the process connection can damage the electronics. To avoid damage, apply torque
only to the hex-shaped process connection.
A
B
A. Sensor module
B. Process connection
3.7.4
Housing rotation
To improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD display:
Figure 3-10. Housing Rotation
A
A. Housing Rotation Set Screw (5/64-inch)
3.8
1.
Loosen the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64 -in. hex wrench.
2.
Rotate the housing clockwise to the desired location.
3.
If the desired location cannot be achieved due to thread limit, rotate the housing
counterclockwise to the desired location (up to 360° from thread limit).
4.
Re-tighten the housing rotation set screw to no more than 7 in-lbs when desired
location is reached.
Hazardous locations certifications
Individual transmitters are clearly marked with a tag indicating the approvals they carry.
Transmitters must be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards to
maintain these certified ratings. Refer to “Product certifications” on page 200 for information
on these approvals.
58
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
3.9
October 2014
Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds
The 305 Integral Manifold is available in two designs: Traditional and Coplanar. The traditional
305 Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the
market today. The 306 Integral Manifold is used with the 2051T In-Line Transmitters to provide
block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar).
Figure 3-11. Manifolds
2051C AND 304
CONVENTIONAL
2051C AND 305
INTEGRAL TRADITIONAL
Hardware Installation
2051C AND 305 INTEGRAL
COPLANAR
2051T AND 306
IN-LINE
59
Section 3: Hardware Installation
3.9.1
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure
To install a 305 Integral Manifold to a 2051 Transmitter:
1.
Inspect the PTFE sensor module O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If the
O-rings are damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example), replace with O-rings
designed for Rosemount transmitter.
Important
If replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of
the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings.
2.
Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 2.25-in. manifold bolts
for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross
pattern to final torque value. See “Flange bolts” on page 53 for complete bolt
installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should
extend through the top of the sensor module housing.
3.
If the PTFE sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be
re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings.
Note
Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate
mounting effects.
3.9.2
Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure
The 306 Manifold is for use only with a 2051T In-Line Transmitter.
Assemble the 306 Manifold to the 2051T In-Line Transmitter with a thread sealant.
3.9.3
Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation
procedure
To install a 304 Conventional Manifold to a 2051 Transmitter:
60
1.
Align the Conventional Manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold
bolts for alignment.
2.
Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final
torque value. See“Flange bolts” on page 53 for complete bolt installation information
and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of
the sensor module housing.
3.
Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter.
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
3.9.4
October 2014
Integral manifold operation
Three-valve configuration shown.
In normal operation the two isolate valves
between the process and instrument ports will
be open and the equalizing valve(s) will be
closed.
L
H
Drain/
Vent Valve
Drain/Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
To zero the 2051, close the isolate valve to the
low pressure (downstream side) of the
transmitter first.
L
H
Drain/
Vent Valve
Drain/
Vent Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
Next, open the center (equalize) valve(s) to
equalize the pressure on both sides of the
transmitter.
L
H
Drain/Vent
Valve
Drain/Vent
Valve
Equalize
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
The manifold valves are now in the proper
configuration for zeroing the transmitter. To
return the transmitter to service, close the
equalizing valve(s) first.
L
H
Drain/
Vent Valve
Drain/Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
Hardware Installation
61
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Next, open the isolate valve on the low pressure
side of the transmitter.
L
H
Drain/Vent
Valve
Drain/
Vent Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
Five-valve Natural Gas configurations shown:
In normal operation, the two block valves
between the process and instrument
ports will be open, and the equalizing
valves will be closed.
L
H
Test (Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
To zero the Rosemount 2051, first close
the block valve on the low pressure
(downstream) side of the transmitter.
Drain
Vent
(closed)
Process
L
H
Test (Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
Isolate
(closed)
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
Note
Do not open the low side equalize valve before the high side equalize valve. Doing so will
overpressure the transmitter.
62
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Open the equalize valve on the high
pressure (upstream) side of the
transmitter.
L
H
Test (Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(open)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
Open the equalize valve on the low
pressure (downstream) side of the
transmitter. The manifold is now in the
proper configuration for zeroing the
transmitter.
Drain
Vent
(closed)
L
H
Test (Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(open)
Equalize
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
3.10
Process
Isolate
(closed)
Drain
Vent
(closed)
Process
Liquid level measurement
Differential pressure transmitters used for liquid level applications measure hydrostatic pressure
head. Liquid level and specific gravity of a liquid are factors in determining pressure head. This
pressure is equal to the liquid height above the tap multiplied by the specific gravity of the
liquid. Pressure head is independent of volume or vessel shape.
3.10.1
Open vessels
A pressure transmitter mounted near a tank bottom measures the pressure of the liquid above.
Make a connection to the high pressure side of the transmitter, and vent the low pressure side to
the atmosphere. Pressure head equals the liquid’s specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height
above the tap.
Zero range suppression is required if the transmitter lies below the zero point of the desired level
range. Figure 3-12 shows a liquid level measurement example.
3.10.2
Closed vessels
Pressure above a liquid affects the pressure measured at the bottom of a closed vessel. The
liquid specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height plus the vessel pressure equals the pressure
at the bottom of the vessel.
Hardware Installation
63
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
To measure true level, the vessel pressure must be subtracted from the vessel bottom pressure.
To do this, make a pressure tap at the top of the vessel and connect this to the low side of the
transmitter. Vessel pressure is then equally applied to both the high and low sides of the
transmitter. The resulting differential pressure is proportional to liquid height multiplied by the
liquid specific gravity.
Dry leg condition
Low-side transmitter piping will remain empty if gas above the liquid does not condense. This is
a dry leg condition. Range determination calculations are the same as those described for
bottom-mounted transmitters in open vessels, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12. Liquid Level Measurement Example
X
Y
T
20
SUPRESSION
ZERO
mA dc
4
0
90
540
inH2O
Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500 in.).
Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (100 in.).
Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (0.9).
Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water.
Let e equal head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water.
Let Range equal e to e + h.
Then h=(X)(SG)
=500 x 0.9
=450 inH2O
e=(Y)(SG)
=100 x 0.9
=90 inH2O
Range =90 to 540 inH2O
64
Hardware Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Wet leg condition
Condensation of the gas above the liquid slowly causes the low side of the transmitter piping to
fill with liquid. The pipe is purposely filled with a convenient reference fluid to eliminate this
potential error. This is a wet leg condition.
The reference fluid will exert a head pressure on the low side of the transmitter. Zero elevation of
the range must then be made.
Figure 3-13. Wet Leg Example
X
Z
Y
LT
H
L
Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500 in.).
Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (50 in.).
Let z equal the vertical distance between the top of the liquid in the wet leg and the transmitter datum line (600 in.).
Let SG1 equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.0).
Let SG2 equal the specific gravity of the fluid in the wet leg (1.1).
Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water.
Let e equal the head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water.
Let s equal head pressure produced by z expressed in inches of water.
Let Range equal e – s to h + e – s.
Then h = (X)(SG1)
= 500 x 1.0
= 500 in H2O
e = (Y)(SG1)
= 50 x 1.0
= 50 inH2O
s = (z)(SG2)
= 600 x 1.1
= 660 inH20
Range = e – s to h + e – s.
= 50 – 660 to 500 + 50 – 660
= –610 to –110 inH20
20
ZERO ELEVATION
mA dc
4
-610
-110
0
inH2O
Hardware Installation
65
Reference Manual
Section 3: Hardware Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Bubbler system in open vessel
A bubbler system that has a top-mounted pressure transmitter can be used in open vessels. This
system consists of an air supply, pressure regulator, constant flow meter, pressure transmitter,
and a tube that extends down into the vessel.
Bubble air through the tube at a constant flow rate. The pressure required to maintain flow
equals the liquid’s specific gravity multiplied by the vertical height of the liquid above the tube
opening. Figure 3-14 shows a bubbler liquid level measurement example.
Figure 3-14. Bubbler Liquid Level Measurement Example
AIR
T
X
Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (100 in.).
Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.1).
Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water.
Let Range equal zero to h.
Then h = (X)(SG)
= 100 x 1.1
= 110 inH2O
Range = 0 to 110 inH2O
20
mA dc
4
0
110
inH2O
66
Hardware Installation
Section 4: Electrical Installation
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 4
Electrical Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 68
Configuring transmitter security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69
Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 70
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 71
4.1
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations for the Rosemount 2051. A
Quick Start Guide is shipped with every transmitter to describe pipe-fitting, wiring procedures
and basic configuration for initial installation.
Note
For transmitter disassembly and reassembly refer to sections “Disassembly procedures” on
page 86, and “Reassembly procedures” on page 88.
4.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.


Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.

Electrical Installation
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
67
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
4.3
LCD display
Transmitters ordered with the LCD display option (M5) are shipped with the display installed.
Installing the display on an existing 2051 Transmitter requires a small instrument screwdriver.
Carefully align the desired display connector with the electronics board connector. If
connectors don't align, the display and electronics board are not compatible.
Figure 4-1. LCD Display Assembly
A
B
A. LCD display
B. Cover
4.3.1
Rotating LCD display
1.
Secure the loop to manual control and remove power to transmitter.
2.
Remove transmitter housing cover.
3.
Remove screws from the LCD display and rotate to desired orientation.
a.
68
Insert 10 pin connector into the display board for the correct orientation. Carefully
align pins for insertion into the output board.
4.
Re-insert screws.
5.
Reattach transmitter housing cover; it is recommended the cover be tightened until
there is no gap between the cover and housing to comply with explosion proof
requirements.
6.
Re-attach power and return loop to automatic control.
Electrical Installation
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
4.4
October 2014
Configuring transmitter security and simulation
There are two security methods with the Rosemount 2051 Transmitter, use of the security
switch and software configured security using (see “Enable software write lock” on page 30).
Use of the security switch is described below.

Security switch
Figure 4-2. Simulate and Security Switches
C
B
A
D
E
F
A. Simulate disabled position
B. Simulate switch
C. Simulate enabled position (default)
D. Security locked position
E. Security switch
F. Security unlocked position (default)
4.4.1
Setting security switch
Set Simulate and Security switch configuration before installation as shown in Figure 4-2.

The simulate switch enables or disables simulated alerts and simulated AI Block status
and values. The default simulate switch position is enabled.

The Security switch allows (unlocked symbol) or prevents (locked symbol) any
configuration of the transmitter.
–
Default security is off (unlocked symbol).
–
The security switch can be enabled or disabled in software.
Use the following procedure to change the switch configuration:
1.
If the transmitter is installed, secure the loop, and remove power.
2.
Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side. Do not remove the
instrument cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
3.
Slide the security and simulate switches into the preferred position.
4.
Reattach transmitter housing cover; it is recommended the cover be tightened until
there is no gap between the cover and housing to comply with explosion proof
requirements.
Electrical Installation
69
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
4.4.2
Setting simulate switch
The SIMULATE switch is located on the electronics. It is used in conjunction with the transmitter
simulate software to simulate process variables and/or alerts and alarms. To simulate variables
and/or alerts and alarms, the SIMULATE switch must be moved to the ENABLE position and the
software enabled through the host. To disable simulation, the switch must be in the DISABLE
position or the software simulate parameter must be disabled through the host.
4.5
Electrical considerations
Note
Make sure all electrical installation is in accordance with national and local code requirements.
Do not run signal wiring in conduit or open trays with power wiring or near heavy electrical
equipment.
4.5.1
Conduit installation
If all connections are not sealed, excess moisture accumulation can damage the
transmitter. Make sure to mount the transmitter with the electrical housing positioned
downward for drainage. To avoid moisture accumulation in the housing, install wiring with
a drip loop, and ensure the bottom of the drip loop is mounted lower than the conduit
connections of the transmitter housing.
Recommended conduit connections are shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3. Conduit Installation Diagrams
A
B
B
A
INCORRECT
A. Possible conduit line positions
B. Sealing compound
70
Electrical Installation
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
4.5.2
October 2014
Power supply for FOUNDATION fieldbus
Power supply
The transmitter requires between 9 and 32 V dc (9 and 30 V dc for intrinsic safety, and 9 and
17.5 V dc for FISCO intrinsic safety) to operate and provide complete functionality.
Power conditioner
A fieldbus segment requires a power conditioner to isolate the power supply, filter, and
decouple the segment from other segments attached to the same power supply.
4.6
Wiring
4.6.1
Transmitter wiring
Wiring and power supply requirements can be dependent upon the approval certification. As
with all FOUNDATION™ fieldbus requirements, a conditioned power supply and terminating
resistors are required for proper operation. The standard 2051 Pressure Transmitter terminal
block is shown in Figure 4-5. The terminals are not polarity sensitive. The transmitter requires
9-32 Vdc to operate. Type A FOUNDATION fieldbus wiring 18 awg twisted shielded pair is
recommended. Do not exceed 5000 ft (1500 m) total segment length.
Note
Avoid running instrument cable next to power cables in cable trays or near heavy electrical
equipment.
It is important that the instrument cable shield be:
- trimmed close and insulated from touching the transmitter housing
- continuously connected throughout the segment
- connected to a good earth ground at the power supply end
Figure 4-4. Wiring Terminals
C
A
B
E
F
DP
D
A. Minimize distance
B. Trim shield and insulate
C. Protective Grounding Terminal (do not ground cable shield at the transmitter)
D. Insulate Shield
E. Minimize distance
F. Connect Shield Back to the Power Supply Ground
Electrical Installation
71
Section 4: Electrical Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Perform the following procedure to make wiring connections:
4.6.2
1.
Remove the housing cover on terminal compartment side. Do not remove the cover in
explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live. Signal wiring supplies all power to the
transmitter.
2.
Plug and seal unused conduit connection on the transmitter housing to avoid moisture
accumulation in the terminal side.
Grounding the transmitter
Signal cable shield grounding
Signal cable shield grounding is summarized in Figure 4-4 on page 71. The signal cable shield
and unused shield drain wire must be trimmed and insulated, ensuring that the signal cable
shield and drain wire do not come in contact with the transmitter case. See “Transmitter case
grounding” on page 73 for instructions on grounding the transmitter case. Follow the steps
below to correctly ground the signal cable shield.
Do not run signal wiring in conduit or open trays with power wiring, or near heavy electrical
equipment. Grounding terminations are provided on the outside of the electronics housing and
inside the terminal compartment. These grounds are used when transient protect terminal
blocks are installed or to fulfill local regulations.
1.
Remove the field terminals housing cover.
2.
Connect the wiring pair and ground as indicated in “Wiring” on page 71.
a.
Trim the cable shield as short as practical and insulate from touching the transmitter
housing.
Note
Do NOT ground the cable shield at the transmitter; if the cable shield touches the transmitter
housing, it can create ground loops and interfere with communications.
b. Continuously connect the cable shields to the power supply ground.
c.
Connect the cable shields for the entire segment to a single good earth ground at the
power supply.
Note
Improper grounding is the most frequent cause of poor segment communications.
72
3.
Replace the housing cover. It is recommended that the cover be tightened until there is
no gap between the cover and the housing.
4.
Plug and seal unused conduit connections.
Electrical Installation
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Transmitter case grounding
Always ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The
most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with
minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include:

Internal ground connection: The internal ground connection screw is inside the FIELD
TERMINALS side of the electronics housing. This screw is identified by a ground symbol
( ). The ground connection screw is standard on all Rosemount 2051 Transmitters.
Refer to Figure 4-5 on page 73.

External ground connection: The external ground connection is located on the exterior
of the transmitter housing. Refer to Figure 4-6 on page 73. This connection is only
available with option V5 and T1.
Figure 4-5. Internal Ground Connection
A
A. Internal ground location
Figure 4-6. External Ground Connection (Option V5 or T1)
A
A. External ground location
Note
Grounding the transmitter case via threaded conduit connection may not provide sufficient
ground continuity.
Electrical Installation
73
Reference Manual
Section 4: Electrical Installation
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Transient protection terminal block grounding
The transmitter can withstand electrical transients of the energy level usually encountered in
static discharges or induced switching transients. However, high-energy transients, such as
those induced in wiring from nearby lightning strikes, can damage the transmitter.
The transient protection terminal block can be ordered as an installed option (Option Code T1)
or as a spare part to retrofit existing 2051 Transmitters in the field. See “Spare parts” on
page 193 for part numbers. The lightning bolt symbol shown in Figure 4-7 on page 74 identifies
the transient protection terminal block.
Figure 4-7. Transient Protection Terminal Block
A
B
A. External ground connection location
B. Lightning bolt location
Note
The transient protection terminal block does not provide transient protection unless the
transmitter case is properly grounded. Use the guidelines to ground the transmitter case. Refer
to Figure 4-7.
74
Electrical Installation
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 5
Operation and Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform a calibration or sensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
page 75
page 75
page 76
page 80
page 81
Overview
Absolute pressure transmitters (2051CA and 2051TA) are calibrated at the factory.
Trimming adjusts the position of the factory characterization curve. It is possible to
degrade performance of the transmitter if any trim is done improperly or with inaccurate
equipment.
This section contains information on operation and maintenance procedures.
Field Communicator and AMS® Device Manager instructions are given to perform configuration
functions.
5.1.1
Methods and manual operation
Each FOUNDATION™ fieldbus host or configuration tool has different ways of displaying and
performing operations. Some hosts will use Device Descriptions (DD) and DD Methods to
complete device configuration and will display data consistently across platforms. The DD can
be found on FOUNDATION’s website at www.fieldbus.org. There is no requirement that a host or
configuration tool support these features.
For DeltaV™ users, the DD can be found at www.easydeltav.com. The information in this section
will describe how to use methods in a general fashion.
5.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Operation and Maintenance
75
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
5.2.1
Warnings
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the
instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.

In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.

Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.


Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Performing a 'Restart with defaults' will set all function block information in the device to
factory defaults. This includes the clearing of all function block links and schedule, as well as
defaulting all Resource and Transducer Block user data (LCD display Transducer Block
parameter configuration, etc.).
5.3
Calibration overview
The Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter is an accurate instrument that is fully calibrated
in the factory. Field calibration is provided to the user to meet plant requirements or
industry standards.
Sensor calibration allows the user to adjust the pressure (digital value) reported by the
transmitter to be equal to a pressure standard. The sensor calibration can adjust the pressure
offset to correct for mounting conditions or line pressure effects. This correction is
recommended. The calibration of the pressure range (pressure span or gain correction) is not
recommended for new instruments.
Calibrate the sensor
76

Sensor Trim ( "Perform a calibration or sensor trim" on page 81)

Zero Trim ( "Perform a calibration or sensor trim" on page 81)
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
5.3.1
October 2014
Determining necessary sensor trims
Bench calibration is not recommended for new instruments. It is possible to degrade the
performance of the transmitter if a trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment. The
transmitter can be set back to factory settings using the Recall Factory Trim command shown in
Figure 5-3 on page 83.
For transmitters that are field installed, the manifolds discussed in "Rosemount 305, 306, and
304 Manifolds" on page 51 allow the differential transmitter to be zeroed using the zero trim
function. Both 3-valve and 5-valve manifolds are discussed. This field calibration will eliminate
any pressure offsets caused by mounting effects (head effect of the oil fill) and static pressure
effects of the process.
Determine the necessary trims with the following steps.
5.3.2
1.
Apply pressure.
2.
Check the pressure, if the pressure does not match the applied pressure, perform a
sensor trim. See "Perform a calibration or sensor trim" on page 81.
Determining calibration frequency
Calibration frequency can vary greatly depending on the application, performance
requirements, and process conditions. Use the following procedure to determine calibration
frequency that meets the needs of your application.
1.
Determine the performance required for your application.
2.
Determine the operating conditions.
3.
Calculate the Total Probable Error (TPE).
4.
Calculate the stability per month.
5.
Calculate the calibration frequency.
Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051
Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application.
Required Performance:
0.30% of span
Step 2: Determine the operating conditions.
Transmitter:
Rosemount 2051CD, Range 2 [URL=250 inH2O(623 mbar)]
Calibrated Span:
150 inH2O (374 mbar)
Ambient Temperature
Change:
± 50 °F (28 °C)
Line Pressure:
500 psig (34,5 bar)
Step 3: Calculate total probable error (TPE).
TPE =
2
2
2
 ReferenceAccuracy  +  TemperatureEffect  +  StaticPressureEffect  = 0.189% of span
Where:
Reference Accuracy =
± 0.065% of span
0.025  URL 
Ambient Temperature Effect =  -------------------------------------- + 0.125 % per 50 °F =  0.167% of span

Span Static Pressure Effect(1) =
Span
0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) =  0.05% of span at maximum span
(1) Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure.
Operation and Maintenance
77
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Step 4: Calculate the stability per month.
 0.100  URL 
Stability =  --------------------------------------- % of span for 2 years =  0.0069% of URL for 1 month
Span
Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency.
 Req. Performance – TPE 
 0.3% – 0.189% 
Cal. Freq. = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------- = 16xmonths
Stability per Month
0.0069%
Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051C with P8 option
(0.05% accuracy & 5-year stability)
Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application.
Required Performance:
0.30% of span
Step 2: Determine the operating conditions.
Transmitter:
2051CD, Range 2 [URL=250 inH2O(623 mbar)]
Calibrated Span:
Ambient
Temperature Change:
Line Pressure:
150 inH2O (374 mbar)
± 50 °F (28 °C)
500 psig (34,5 bar)
Step 3: Calculate total probable error (TPE).
TPE =
2
2
2
 ReferenceAccuracy  +  TemperatureEffect  +  StaticPressureEffect  = 0.117% of span
Where:
Reference Accuracy =
Ambient Temperature Effect =
± 0.05% of span
0.025  URL
  ---------------------------------- + 0.125 per 50 °F =  0.0833% of span


Span
Span Static Pressure Effect(1) =
0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) = 0.05% of span at maximum span
(1) Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure.
Step 4: Calculate the stability per month.
 0.125  URL 
Stability =  --------------------------------------- % of span for 5 years =  0.0035% of span per month
Span
Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency.
 Req. Performance – TPE 
 0.3% – 0.117% 
Cal. Freq. = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------- = 52months
Stability per Month
0.0035%
5.3.3
Compensating for span line pressure effects
(range 4 and range 5)
Rosemount 2051 Range 4 and 5 Pressure Transmitters require a special calibration procedure
when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to optimize
transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these applications. The
78
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Rosemount 2051 Differential Pressure Transmitters (ranges 1 through 3) do not require this
procedure because optimization occurs at the sensor.
The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is -0.95% of reading
per 1000psi (69 bar) for Range 4 transmitters, and -1% of reading per 1000psi (69 bar) for Range
5 transmitters. Using the following procedure, the span effect can be corrected to ±0.2% of
reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to 250 bar).
Use the following example to compute correct input values.
Example
A range 4 differential pressure transmitter (Rosemount 2051CD4...) will be used in an
application with a static line pressure of 1200 psi (83 bar). To correct for systematic error caused
by high static line pressure, first use the following formulas to determine the corrected values
for the high trim value.
High trim value
HT = (URV - (S/100 x P/1000 x LRV))
Where:
HT =
Corrected High Trim Value
URV =
Upper Range Value
S=
Span shift per specification (as a percent of reading)
P=
Static Line Pressure in psi
URV =
1500 inH2O (3.74 bar)
S=
-0.95%
P=
1200 psi
LT =
1500 - (-0.95%/100 x 1200 psi/1000 psi x 1500 inH2O)
LT =
1517.1 inH20
In this example:
Complete the Upper Sensor Trim procedure as described in "Perform a calibration or sensor
trim" on page 81. In the example above, at step 4, apply the nominal pressure value of 1500
inH20. However, enter the calculated correct upper Sensor Trim value of 1517.1 inH20 with a
Field Communicator.
Note
The Range Values for the 4 and 20 mA points should be at the nominal URV and LRV. In the
example above, the values are 1500 inH20 and 500 inH20 respectively. Confirm the values on
the HOME screen of the Field Communicator. Modify, if needed, by following the steps in
"Rerange the transmitter" on page 15.
Operation and Maintenance
79
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
5.4
Trim the pressure signal
5.4.1
Sensor trim overview
A Sensor Trim corrects the pressure offset and pressure range to match a pressure standard. The
upper Sensor Trim corrects the pressure range and the lower Sensor Trim (Zero Trim) corrects
the pressure offset. An accurate pressure standard is required for full calibration. A zero trim can
be performed if the process is vented, or the high and low side pressure are equal (for
differential pressure transmitters).
Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position
effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting
position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be
used in place of a Sensor Trim over the full sensor range.
When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled
to the correct levels. Line pressure should be applied to the transmitter during a zero trim to
eliminate line pressure errors. Refer to "Integral manifold operation" on page 61.
Note
FOUNDATION fieldbus has no analog signal that needs ranging. Therefore, ranging a new device
prior to installation is usually not necessary or recommended.
Note
Do not perform a zero trim on Rosemount 2051T Absolute Pressure Transmitters. Zero trim is
zero based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting
position effects on a 2051T Absolute Pressure Transmitter, perform a low trim within the Sensor
Trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim
function, but it does not require zero-based input.
Upper and lower sensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are
applied, all output is linearized between them, and requires an accurate pressure source. Always
adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct offset. Adjustment of the high trim value
provides a slope correction to the characterization curve based on the low trim value. The trim
values help optimize performance over a specific measurement range.
Figure 5-1. Sensor Trim Example
A
A
B
B
A. Before Trim
B. After Trim
80
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
5.4.2
October 2014
Perform a calibration or sensor trim
When performing a Sensor Trim, if both upper and lower trims are to be performed, the lower
trim must be done prior to the upper trim.
Note
Use a pressure input source that is at least four times more accurate than the transmitter, and
allow the input pressure to stabilize for 60 seconds before entering any values.
Performing a sensor trim
Note
Calibration and sensor trims are performed in the sensor transducer block. For block oriented
user interfaces, perform calibrations and trims in the sensor transducer block.
Menu Navigation: <Overview>, <Calibration>, <Sensor Trim>
All sensor trims, and restoring factory calibration can be performed using the Overview and
Service Tools branches of the menu tree. In addition, calibrations and trims can be documented
with the information stored to an asset management system.
Navigate to the Sensor Trim screen and click on the button for the type of trim desired. An
automated procedure called a ‘Method’ will guide the user through the desired trim procedure.
The automated procedure for upper and lower sensor trims includes steps for documenting
pressure, units, date, and name of person performing the trim and physical location where the
trim was performed. This information can be entered or edited for full calibrations in “Last
Calibration Points”, and “Calibration Details”.
Note
Generally only a zero trim should be performed. For high static pressure applications, a lower
and upper trim can be performed.
Note
Refer to Section 5: Calibration overview through Section 5: Sensor trim overview for information
on the various types of trims. Refer to "Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds" on page 59 for
manifold operation instructions to properly drain/vent valves.
Note
If both an upper and lower sensor trim are needed, perform the lower trim first.
Operation and Maintenance
81
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 5-2. Sensor Trim Screen
The “Sensor Trim” “Upper, Lower, Zero, and Restore” buttons start automated procedures
called Methods which guide the user through the sequence of steps needed to perform the
desired trim. “Upper and lower” trims require a pressure source. In addition, for “Upper, lower,
and zero” trims the user will need to place manifold valves in the proper position to perform the
trim, and return the manifold valves to the proper positions for normal operation. “Restore
Factory Calibration” doesn’t require a pressure source or manipulation of manifold valves.
To calibrate the sensor using the Sensor Trim function, perform the following procedure:
1.
Select Lower Sensor Trim.
Note
Select pressure points so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the expected
process operation range.
5.5
Status
Along with the measured or calculated PV value, every FOUNDATION fieldbus block passes an
additional parameter called STATUS. The PV and STATUS are passed from the Transducer Block
to the Analog Input Block. The STATUS can be one of the following: GOOD, BAD, or UNCERTAIN.
When there are no problems detected by the self-diagnostics of the block, the STATUS will be
GOOD. If a problem occurs with the hardware in the device, or, the quality of the process
variable is compromised for some reason, the STATUS will become either BAD or UNCERTAIN
depending upon the nature of the problem. It is important that the Control Strategy that makes
use of the Analog Input Block is configured to monitor the STATUS and take action where
appropriate when the STATUS is no longer GOOD.
82
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
5.6
Master reset method
5.6.1
Resource block
Menu Navigation: <Service Tools>, <Maintenance>, <Reset / Restore>
Note: Master Reset (sometimes called restart) is performed in the resource block. For block
oriented user interfaces, perform the reset in the resource block.
There are two master reset options. One restarts the transmitter processor but doesn't change
device configuration. The second is a restart with factory defaults. It returns all device and
function block parameters to the factory defaults. An automated procedure called a “Method”
will guide the user through both reset options.
Figure 5-3. Master Reset Button
The “Master Reset” button starts the method that initiates the reset and verifies the reset is
complete. Note that during the reset communication between the device and the host will be
lost. There may be some delay before the device is recognized again by the host.
Set the RESTART to one of the options below:

Run - Default State

Resource - Not Used

Defaults - Sets all device parameters to FOUNDATION fieldbus default values

Processor - Does a software reset of the CPU
Operation and Maintenance
83
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
5.7
Simulation
Simulate replaces the channel value coming from the Sensor Transducer Block. For testing
purposes, it is possible to manually drive the output of the Analog Input Block to a desired value.
There are two ways to do this.
5.7.1
Manual mode
To change only the OUT_VALUE and not the OUT_STATUS of the AI Block, place the TARGET
MODE of the block to MANUAL. Then, change the OUT_VALUE to the desired value.
5.7.2
84
Simulate
1.
If the SIMULATE switch is in the OFF position, move it to the ON position.
2.
To change both the OUT_VALUE and OUT_STATUS of the AI Block, set the TARGET
MODE to AUTO.
3.
Set SIMULATE_ENABLE_DISABLE to ‘Active’.
4.
Enter the desired SIMULATE_VALUE to change the OUT_VALUE and
SIMULATE_STATUS_QUALITY to change the OUT_STATUS.
5.
Set SIMULATE_ENABLE_DISABLE to 'Inactive' to return the AI block to normal operation.
Operation and Maintenance
Section 6: Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 6
Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting and diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
page 85
page 85
page 86
page 88
page 91
page 93
page 94
Overview
This section provides summarized troubleshooting suggestions for the most common
operating problems. This section contains Rosemount 2051 fieldbus troubleshooting
information only. Disassembly and reassembly procedures can be found in the “Disassembly
procedures” on page 86 and “Reassembly procedures” on page 88.
Follow the procedures described here to verify transmitter hardware and process connections
are in good working order. Always deal with the most likely checkpoints first.
Table 6-3 on page 93 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for
the most common operating problems.
If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field
Communicator display, consider using “Troubleshooting guides” on page 91 to identify any
potential problem.
6.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Troubleshooting
85
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
6.2.1
Warnings
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
Before connecting a field communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the
instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.

In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.


Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.

Static electricity can damage sensitive components.
Observe safe handling precautions for static-sensitive components.

6.3
Disassembly procedures
Do not remove the instrument cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
6.3.1
Removing from service
Follow these steps:
1.
Follow all plant safety rules and procedures.
2.
Power down device.
3.
Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from
service.
4.
Remove all electrical leads and disconnect conduit.
5.
Remove the transmitter from the process connection.
a.
86
The Rosemount 2051C Transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts
and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the transmitter from
the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for
re-installation. Reference Figure 3-7 on page 54 for coplanar flange.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
b. The Rosemount 2051T Transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut
process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process.
Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in “Housing rotation” on page 58.
6.3.2
6.
Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms.
7.
Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with
clear water.
8.
For the 2051C, whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually
inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace the O-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as
nicks or cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused.
Removing terminal block
Electrical connections are located on the terminal block in the compartment labeled “FIELD
TERMINALS.”
6.3.3
1.
Remove the housing cover from the field terminal side.
See “Safety messages” on page 85 for complete warning.
2.
Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly in the 9 o’clock and 5 o’clock
positions relative to the top of the transmitter.
3.
Pull the entire terminal block out to remove it.
Removing electronics board
The transmitter electronics board is located in the compartment opposite the terminal side. To
remove the electronics board see Figure 4-1 on page 68 and perform following procedure:
1.
Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side.
2.
If you are disassembling a transmitter with a LCD display, loosen the two captive screws
that are visible (See Figure 4.3 LCD Display for screw locations). on the front of the
meter display. The two screws anchor the LCD display to the electronics board and the
electronics board to the housing.
Note
The electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for
static-sensitive components
3.
Using the two captive screws, slowly pull the electronics board out of the housing. The
sensor module ribbon cable holds the electronics board to the housing. Disengage the
ribbon cable by pushing the connector release.
Note
If an LCD display is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces
between the LCD display and electronics board.
Troubleshooting
87
Section 6: Troubleshooting
6.3.4
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Removing sensor module from the electronics housing
1.
Remove the electronics board. Refer to “Removing electronics board” on page 87.
Important
To prevent damage to the sensor module ribbon cable, disconnect it from the electronics board
before you remove the sensor module from the electrical housing.
2.
Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside of the internal black cap.
Note
Do not remove the housing until after you tuck the cable connector completely inside of the
internal black cap. The black cap protects the ribbon cable from damage that can occur when
you rotate the housing.
6.4
3.
Using a 5/64-inch hex wrench, loosen the housing rotation set screw one full turn.
4.
Unscrew the module from the housing, making sure the black cap on the sensor
module and sensor cable do not catch on the housing.
Reassembly procedures
1.
Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary.
Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal.
2.
Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so,
turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable.
3.
Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable
on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap.
4.
Turn the module clockwise into the housing.
Important
Make sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing
as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable
become hung up and rotate with the housing.
5.
Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more
than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof
requirements.
See “Safety messages” on page 85 for complete warning.
6.
88
Tighten the housing rotation set screw to no more than 7 in-lbs when desired location is
reached.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
October 2014
Attaching electronics board
1.
Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach
it to the electronics board.
2.
Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing.
Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the
receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide
gently on the connections.
3.
Tighten the captive mounting screws.
4.
Replace the housing cover. It is recommended the cover be tightened until there is no
gap between the cover and the housing.
Installing terminal block
1.
Gently slide the terminal block into place, making sure the two power posts from the
electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the terminal block.
2.
Tighten the captive screws.
3.
Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be fully engaged to
meet Explosion-Proof requirements.
Reassembling the 2051C process flange
1.
Inspect the sensor module PTFE O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. Replace
O-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.
Note
If you are replacing the O-rings, be careful not to scratch the O-ring grooves or the surface of the
isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged O-rings.
2.
Install the process connection. Possible options include:
a.
Coplanar™ Process Flange:
– Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger
tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not over-tighten as this will affect
module-to-flange alignment.
– Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange.
b. Coplanar Process Flange with Flange Adapters:
– Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger
tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not over-tighten as this will affect
module-to-flange alignment.
– Hold the flange adapters and adapter O-rings in place while installing (in the desired
of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using four 2.88-inch
bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage pressure configurations, use
two 2.88-inch bolts and two 1.75-inch bolts
c.
Manifold:
– Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures.
Troubleshooting
89
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
3.
Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-1 on
page 90 for appropriate torque values.
4.
Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-1 on page
90.
Table 6-1. Bolt Installation Torque Values
Bolt material
Initial torque value
Final torque value
CS-ASTM-A445 Standard
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
316 SST—Option L4
150 in-lb. (17 N-m)
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
ASTM-A-19 B7M—Option L5
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8M—Option L8
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
Note
If you replaced the PTFE sensor module O-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to
compensate for cold flow of the O-ring material.
Note
For Range 1 transmitters: after replacing O-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the
transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in
a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two
hours before calibration.
See “Safety messages” on page 85 for complete warning.
6.4.4
90
Installing drain/vent valve
1.
Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the
threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply five clockwise turns of sealing tape.
2.
Tighten the drain/vent valve to 250 in-lb. (28.25 N-m).
3.
Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the
ground and away from human contact when the valve is opened.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
6.5
October 2014
Troubleshooting guides
Figure 6-1. Problems with Communications Flowchart
PROBLEMS WITH COMMUNICATIONS
Device does not appear
on segment.
Device does not
stay on segment.
1. Check wiring and power to device.
2. Recycle power to device.
3. Electronic failure.
Refer to Device does not show up on segment
in Table 6-2 for more information.
Problem Identified?
Yes
Perform Recommended
Action, see Table 6-2.
Check Segment, see Device does not
stay on segment in Table 6-2 for
more information.
No
If the problem persists
contact your local Rosemount
representative.
Problem Identified?
Yes
No
Perform Recommended
Action, see Table 6-2.
If the problem persists
contact your local Rosemount
representative.
Note
Use this flowchart if other devices appear on the segment, communicate, and remain on the
segment. If other devices don't appear on the segment, communicate, or stay on the segment
the electrical characteristics of the segment should be checked.
Troubleshooting
91
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure 6-2. Rosemount 2051 Troubleshooting Flowchart
COMMUNICATIONS ESTABLISHED BUT HAVE “BLOCK_ERR” OR AN
“ALARM” CONDITION
See Table 6-3
Problem Identified?
Perform Recommended
Action, see Table 6-6.
Yes
No
Table 6-2. Troubleshooting Guide
Symptom(1)
Cause
Device does not
Unknown
show up on segment No power to device
Segment problems
Electronics failing
Incompatible network settings
Device does not stay
on segment(2)
Incorrect signal levels.
Refer to host documentation for
procedure.
Excess noise on segment.
Refer to host documentation for
procedure.
Electronics failing
Other
Recommended actions
1. Recycle power to device.
1. Ensure the device is connected to the segment.
2. Check voltage at terminals. There should be 9–32Vdc.
3. Check to ensure the device is drawing current. There should be
approximately 17 mA.
N/A
1. Electronics board loose in housing.
2. Replace electronics.
1. Change host network parameters.
2. Refer to host documentation for procedure.
3. See “Capabilities” on page 14 for device network parameter
values.
1. Check for two terminators.
2. Excess cable length.
3. Bad Power supply or conditioner
1. Check for incorrect grounding.
2. Check for correct shielded wire.
3. Tighten all wiring and shield connections on the effected part of
the segment.
4. Check for corrosion or moisture on terminals.
5. Check for bad power supply.
6. Check for electrically noisy equipment attached to the
instrument ground.
1. Tighten electronics board.
2. Replace electronics.
1. Check for water in the terminal housing.
(1) The corrective actions should be done with consultation of your system integrator.
(2) Wiring and installation 31.25 kbit/s, voltage mode, wire medium application guide AG-140 available from the fieldbus Foundation.
92
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
6.6
October 2014
Troubleshooting and diagnostic messages
Detailed tables of the possible messages that will appear on either the LCD display, a Field
Communicator, or a PC based configuration and maintenance system are listed in the section
below. Use the table below to diagnose particular status messages.
Table 6-3. Status Messages
Diagnostic
(alternate
name)
Default
configu- LCD display
ration
message
NE107
Alert
PlantWeb® Alert
Failure
Failure
Incompatible
Module
The pressure sensor is
incompatible with the
attached electronics.
1. Replace with electronics board or
sensor module with compatible
hardware.
Enabled
^^^^XMTR
MSMTCH
0x10000000
Failure
Failure
Sensor Failure
An error has been
detected in the
pressure sensor.
1. Check the interface cable between the
sensor module and the electronics
board.
Enabled
^^^^FAIL
SENSOR
0x20000000
Enabled
^^^^FAIL
^BOARD
0x40000000
Enabled
PRES^OUT
LIMITS
0x00100000
1. Check the process and ambient
The sensor
temperature is outside
temperature conditions are within -85
the transmitter's
to 194 °F (-65 to 90 °C).
operating range.
2.Replace the sensor module.
Enabled
TEMP^OUT
LIMITS
0x00008000
Enabled
N/A
0x00000010
Description
Recommended actions
Associated
status bits
2.Replace the sensor module.
Failure
Failure
Electronics
Failure
Offspec
Maintenance
Pressure Out of
Limits
A failure has occurred
in the electronics
board.
1. Replace with electronics board.
The process pressure is 1. Verify the applied pressure is within
the range of the pressure sensor.
outside the
transmitter's
measurement range.
2.Verify the manifold valves are in the
proper position.
3.Check the transmitter pressure
connection to verify it is not plugged or
the isolating diaphragms are not
damaged.
4.Replace the sensor module.
Offspec
Maintenance
Sensor
Temperature Out
of Limits
Maintenance
Maintenance
Display Update
Failure
1. Check the connection between the
The display is not
receiving updates from
display and the electronics board.
the electronics board.
2.Replace the display.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Alert Simulation
Enabled
Alert simulation is
enabled. The active
alerts are simulated
and any real alerts are
suppressed.
1. To view real alerts, disable the alerts
simulation.
Enabled
N/A
FD_SIMULATE
.ENABLE
0x02
Function
Check
Advisory
Function Check
The sensor transducer
block mode is not in
auto.
1. Check if any transducer block is
currently under maintenance.
Enabled
N/A
0x00000001
3.Replace the electronics board.
2.If no transducer block is under
maintenance, then follow site
procedures to change the affected
transducer block's Actual Mode to Auto.
Troubleshooting
93
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
6.7
Analog Input (AI) function block
This section describes error conditions that are supported by the AI Block. Read Table 6-5 to
determine the appropriate corrective action.
Table 6-4. AI BLOCK_ERR Conditions
Condition
number Condition name and description
0
1
3
7
14
15
Other
Block Configuration Error: the selected channel carries a measurement that is
incompatible with the engineering units selected in XD_SCALE, the L_TYPE parameter is
not configured, or CHANNEL = zero.
Simulate Active: Simulation is enabled and the block is using a simulated value in its
execution.
Input Failure/Process Variable has Bad Status: The hardware is bad, or a bad status is
being simulated.
Power Up
Out of Service: The actual mode is out of service.
Table 6-5. Troubleshooting the AI Block
Symptom
Possible causes
Recommended actions
Bad or no pressure readings
(Read the AI “BLOCK_ERR”
parameter)
BLOCK_ERR reads OUT OF
SERVICE (OOS)
BLOCK_ERR reads
CONFIGURATION ERROR
1. AI Block target mode target mode set to OOS.
2. Resource Block OUT OF SERVICE.
1. Check CHANEL parameter (see “Analog input (AI)
function block” on page 111)
2. Check L_TYPE parameter (see “Analog input (AI)
function block” on page 111)
3. Check XD_SCALE engineering units. (see “Analog input
BLOCK_ERR reads POWERUP
1. Download schedule into block. Refer to host for
downloading procedure.
1. Sensor Transducer Block Out Of Service (OOS)
2. Resource Block Out of Service (OOS)
1. Check XD_SCALE parameter.
2. Check OUT_SCALE parameter.
(see “Analog input (AI) function block” on page 111)
1. See “Sensor trim overview” on page 80 to determine the
appropriate trimming or calibration procedure.
1. See “Analog input (AI) function block” on page 111.
(AI) function block” on page 111
BLOCK_ERR reads BAD INPUT
OUT parameter status reads
UNCERTAIN and substatus
reads EngUnitRangViolation.
No BLOCK_ERR but readings are
not correct. If using Indirect
mode, scaling could be wrong.
No BLOCK_ERR. Sensor needs to
be calibrated or Zero trimmed.
Out_ScaleEU_0 and EU_100
settings are incorrect.
Table 6-6. Recommended Actions
Text string
FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE_1
Not Initialized
None
No Action Required
1. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board.
1. Check the interface cable between the Sensor Module and the Fieldbus Electronics Board.
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
1. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board or Sensor Module with compatible hardware.
94
No Active Conditions
Electronics Failure
Sensor Failure
Incompatible Module
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Section 6: Troubleshooting
October 2014
Table 6-6. Recommended Actions
Text string
1. Check the transmitter pressure connection to make sure it is not plugged or isolating
diaphragms are not damaged.
FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE_1
Pressure Out of Limits
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
1. Check the process and ambient temperature conditions are within -85 to 194F (-65 to
90C).
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
1. Check LCD Display connection.
2. Replace the LCD Display.
Display Update Failure
3. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board.
1. Check to see if one of the transducer blocks is currently under maintenance.
2. If none of the transducer blocks are under maintenance, then follow site procedures to
change the affected transducer block’s Actual Mode to Auto.
Simulate is Active - No Action Required
Simulate is Active 1. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board.
Simulate is Active 1. Check the interface cable between the Sensor Module and the Fieldbus Electronics
Board.
Check Function
Simulation–No Active
Conditions
Simulating–Electronics
Failure
Simulating–Sensor Failure
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
Simulate is Active 1. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board or Sensor Module with compatible hardware.
Simulating–Incompatible
Module
Simulate is Active 1. Check the transmitter pressure connection to make sure it is not plugged or isolating
diaphragms are not damaged.
Simulating–Pressure Out of
Limits
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
Simulate is Active 1. Check the process and ambient temperature conditions are within -85 to 194F (-65 to
90C).
Simulating–Sensor
Temperature Out of Limits
2. Replace the Sensor Module.
Simulate is Active 1. Check LCD Display connection.
2. Replace the LCD Display.
Simulating–Display Update
Failure
3. Replace the Fieldbus Electronics Board.
Simulate is Active 1. Check to see if one of the transducer blocks is currently under maintenance.
Simulating–Check Function
2. If none of the transducer blocks are under maintenance, then follow site procedures to
change the affected transducer block’s Actual Mode to Auto.
Troubleshooting
95
Section 6: Troubleshooting
October 2014
96
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Troubleshooting
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Appendix A
Specifications and Reference
Data
Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD display transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1
page 97
page 106
page 111
page 115
page 120
page 123
page 133
page 138
page 152
page 181
page 188
page 193
Resource block
This section contains information on the 2051 Resource Block. Descriptions of all Resource
Block Parameters, errors, and diagnostics are included. The modes, alarm detection, status
handling, and troubleshooting are also discussed.
A.1.1
Definition
The resource block defines the physical resources of the device. The resource block also handles
functionality that is common across multiple blocks. The block has no linkable inputs or
outputs.
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
Writable
mode
ACK_OPTION
(38)
0x0000: No option selected
0x0001: Auto ack write alarm
0x0080: Auto ack block alarm
0x0100: Auto ack fail alarm
0x0200: Auto ack off spec alarm
0x0400: Auto ack maint alarm
0x0800: Auto ack check alarm
0
Enumeration
Selection of which alarms associated with the
resource block will be automatically
acknowledged
O/S, Auto
ADVISE_ACTIVE
(92)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_MAINT_ACTIVE &
FD_CHECK_ACTIVE combined together
Read-Only
ADVISE_ALM
(81)
ADVISE_ALM.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
ADVISE_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
ADVISE_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
ADVISE_ALM.4 - SUB_CODE;
ADVISE_ALM.5 - VALUE;
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb® Alerts.
[None]
[None]
Alarm indicating advisory alarms. These
conditions do not have a direct impact on the
process or device integrity.
Mixed
97
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x00000019
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_MAINT_MAP &
FD_CHECK_MAP combined together
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
ADVISE_PRI
(89)
0 to 15
0
ALARM_SUM
(37)
ALARM_SUM.1 - CURRENT;
ALARM_SUM.2 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
ALARM_SUM.3 - UNREPORTED;
ALARM_SUM.4 - DISABLED;
ALERT_KEY
(4)
Can write any value from 1-255
BLOCK_ALM
(36)
BLOCK_ALM.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
BLOCK_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
BLOCK_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
BLOCK_ALM.4 - SUB_CODE;
BLOCK_ALM.5 - VALUE;
BLOCK_ERR
(6)
0x0000: No errors
0x0001: Other (LSB);
0x0008: Simulate Active;
0x0020: Device Fault State Set;
0x0040: Device Needs Maintenance
Soon;
0x0200: Memory Failure;
0x0400: Lost Static Data;
0x0800: Lost NV Data;
0x2000: Device Needs Maintenance Now;
0x4000: Power-up;
0x8000: Out-of-Service (MSB);
CLR_FSTATE
(30)
ADVISE_ENABLE
(90)
ADVISE_MASK
(91)
Writable
mode
Read-Only
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_MAINT_MASK &
FD_CHECK_MASK combined together
Read-Only
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
[None]
Designates the alarming priority of the
ADVISE_ALM
O/S, Auto
[None]
The current alert status, unacknowledged
states, unreported states, and disabled states
of the alarms associated with the function
block
Mixed
[None]
The identification number of the plant unit
O/S, Auto
[None]
The block alarm is used for all configuration,
hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is
entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the
Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task,
another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has
changed.
Mixed
0x0000
Enumeration
The error status associated with the hardware
or software components associated with a
block; it is a bit string, so that multiple errors
may be shown
Read-Only
0: Uninitialized;
1: Off (Normal operating)
1
Enumeration
Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the
device faultstate state if the field condition, if
any, has cleared.
O/S, Auto
COMPATIBILITY_REV
(67)
8
8
[None]
This parameter is used when replacing field
devices. Specifies the minimum device
revision number of the DD file that is
compatible with this device
Read-Only
CONFIRM_TIME
(33)
A 32-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 4294967295
640000
1/32 msec
The minimum time between retries of alert
reports
O/S, Auto
CYCLE_SEL
(20)
0x0000: No selection
0x0001: Scheduled;
0x0002 Block Execution
0x0000
Enumeration
Cycle Selection - used to select the block
execution method for this resource.
The supported cycle types are: SCHEDULED,
COMPLETION_OF_BLOCK_EXECUTION.
O/S, Auto
CYCLE_TYPE
(19)
0x0001: Scheduled;
0x0002 Block Execution
0x0003
Enumeration
Identifies the block execution methods
available for this resource
“Scheduled” means block execution, is
scheduled through system management
“Block execution” means block execution is
scheduled the completion of execution of
another block
Read-Only
98
0
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Writable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
32_spaces
[None]
String identifying the tag of the resource
which contains the Device Description for the
resource
Read-Only
DD_RESOURCE
(9)
ALL
DD_REV
(13)
1
1
[None]
Revision of the DD associated with the
resource - used by the interface device to
locate the DD file for the resource
Read-Only
DEV_OPTIONS
(72)
0x00000000: No options active
0x00000001: LCD display present
0x00000002: Statistical Process
Monitoring
0
Enumeration
Indicates which device options are enabled.
Some may be enabled in factory and are not
available to the end user.
Read-Only
DEV_REV
(12)
8
8
[None]
Manufacturer revision number associated
with the resource - used by an interface device
to locate the DD file for the resource
Read-Only
DEV_STRING
(7)
[None]
[None]
[None]
Factory use only. Users should not modify.
O/S, Auto
DEV_TYPE
(1)
0x2051
0x2051
Enumeration
Manufacturer's model number associated
with the resource - used by interface devices
to locate the DD file for the resource
Read-Only
[None]
[None]
Used to group device specific informational
parameters
Read-Only
DEVICE_INFO
(11)
Factory defined parameters for display
only, not user modifiable
DOWNLOAD_MODE
(93)
[None]
1
Enumeration
Used by factory only
O/S
FAILED_ACTIVE
(75)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
Read-Only
FAILED_ALM
(84)
FAILED_ALM.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED
FAILED_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE
FAILED_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP
FAILED_ALM.4 - SUB_CODE
FAILED_ALM.5 - VALUE
FAILED_ENABLE
(82)
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
[None]
[None]
Alarm indicating a failure within a device
which makes the device non-operational.
Includes subfields:
UNACKNOWLEDGED,ALARM_STATE,TIME_ST
AMP,SUB_CODE, VALUE
Mixed
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x70000000
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_FAIL_MAP
Read-Only
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
FAILED_PRI
(77)
0 (lowest) to 15 (highest) priority
0 = Field Diagnostics Enabled, PlantWeb
Alerts Disabled
1-15 = PlantWeb Alerts Enable, Field
Diagnostics Disabled
0
[None]
Designates the alarming priority of the
FAILED_ALM. This parameter is also used to
switch between PlantWeb alerts and Field
Diagnostics functionality.
O/S, Auto
FAULT_STATE
(28)
0: Uninitialized;
1: Clear (Normal operating)
1
Enumeration
Condition set by loss of communication to an
output block, failure promoted to an output
block or a physical contact - when faultstate
condition is set, output function blocks will
perform their FSTATE actions
Read-Only
FAILED_MASK
(83)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_FAIL_MASK
Read-Only
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
99
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Writable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
0
Enumeration
This parameter reflects the error conditions
that are being detected as active as selected
for this category. It is a bit string, so that
multiple conditions may be shown.
Read-Only
[None]
Enumeration
This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated active conditions,
which are not masked, for this alarm category
to a Host System.
Mixed
FD_CHECK_ACTIVE
(46)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
FD_CHECK_ALM
(50)
FD_CHECK_ALM.1 UNACKNOWLEDGED;
FD_CHECK_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
FD_CHECK_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
FD_CHECK_ALM.4 - SUBCODE;
FD_CHECK_ALM.5 - VALUE;
FD_CHECK_MAP
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x00000001
Enumeration
This parameter maps conditions to be
detected as active for the CHECK alarm
category. Each condition that can be detected
has a corresponding bit defined in this map. If
the bit is set, it indicates that the condition is in
the CHECK category (and will set the same bit
in FD_CHECK_ACTIVE if the condition occurs).
Multiple bits can be set at the same time.
O/S, Auto
FD_CHECK_MASK
(54)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter allows the user to suppress any
single or multiple conditions that are active, in
this category, from being broadcast to the
host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal
to ‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a
condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e.
allow broadcast of a condition.
O/S, Auto
FD_CHECK_PRI
(62)
0 to 15
0
[None]
This parameter allows the host system to
specify the priority of this alarm category.
O/S, Auto
FD_EXTENDED_
ACTIVE_1
(65)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
A parameter to allow the user finer detail on
conditions causing an active condition in the
FD_*_ACTIVE parameters.This parameter will
display all possible active conditions so there
will always be 1 parameter that will display
active conditions even if they are not mapped
to the categories.
Read-Only
FD_EXTENDED_
MAP_1
(66)
Any bit values are allowed, they will be
discarded. The parameter will always
return and use 0x70108019
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x70108019
Enumeration
A parameter to allow the user finer control on
enabling conditions contributing to the
conditions in FD_*_ACTIVE parameters.Any
bit values are allowed, they will be discarded.
The parameter will always return and use
0x70108019 to map each of the bits.
O/S, Auto
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
(43)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter reflects the error conditions
that are being detected as active as selected
for this category. It is a bit string, so that
multiple conditions may be shown.
Read-Only
100
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Writable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
[None]
Enumeration
This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated active conditions,
which are not masked, for this alarm category
to a Host System.
Mixed
FD_FAIL_ALM
(55)
FD_FAIL_ALM.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
FD_FAIL_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
FD_FAIL_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
FD_FAIL_ALM.4 - SUBCODE;
FD_FAIL_ALM.5 - VALUE;
FD_FAIL_MAP
(47)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x70000000
Enumeration
This parameter maps conditions to be
detected as active for the FAIL alarm category.
Each condition that can be detected has a
corresponding bit defined in this map. If the
bit is set, it indicates that the condition is in the
FAIL category (and will set the same bit in
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE if the condition occurs).
Multiple bits can be set at the same.
O/S, Auto
FD_FAIL_MASK
(51)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter allows the user to suppress any
single or multiple conditions that are active, in
this category, from being broadcast to the
host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal
to ‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a
condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e.
allow broadcast of a condition.
O/S, Auto
FD_FAIL_PRI
(59)
0 to 15
0
[None]
This parameter allows the host system to
specify the priority of this alarm category. Set
using the control host FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
interface.
O/S, Auto
FD_MAINT_ACTIVE
(45)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter reflects the error conditions
that are being detected as active as selected
for this category. It is a bit string, so that
multiple conditions may be shown.
Read-Only
FD_MAINT_ALM
(57)
FD_MAINT_ALM.1 UNACKNOWLEDGED;
FD_MAINT_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
FD_MAINT_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
FD_MAINT_ALM.4 - SUBCODE;
FD_MAINT_ALM.5 - VALUE;
[None]
Enumeration
This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated active conditions,
which are not masked, for this alarm category
to a Host System.
Mixed
FD_MAINT_MAP
(49)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x00000018
Enumeration
This parameter maps conditions to be
detected as active for the MAINT alarm
category. Each condition that can be detected
has a corresponding bit defined in this map. If
the bit is set, it indicates that the condition is in
the MAINT category (and will set the same bit
in FD_MAINT_ACTIVE if the condition occurs).
Multiple bits can be set at the same time.
O/S, Auto
FD_MAINT_MASK
(53)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter allows the user to suppress any
single or multiple conditions that are active, in
this category, from being broadcast to the
host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal
to ‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a
condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e.
allow broadcast of a condition.
O/S, Auto
FD_MAINT_PRI
(61)
0 to 15
0
[None]
This parameter allows the host system to
specify the priority of this alarm category. Set
using the control host FOUNDATION fieldbus
interface.
O/S, Auto
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
101
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Writable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
0
Enumeration
This parameter reflects the error conditions
that are being detected as active as selected
for this category. It is a bit string, so that
multiple conditions may be shown.
Read-Only
[None]
Enumeration
This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated active conditions,
which are not masked, for this alarm category
to a Host System.
Mixed
FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
(44)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM
(56)
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM.1 UNACKNOWLEDGED;
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM.4 - SUBCODE;
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM.5 - VALUE;
FD_OFFSPEC_MAP
(48)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x00108000
Enumeration
This parameter maps conditions to be
detected as active for the OFFSPEC alarm
category. Each condition that can be detected
has a corresponding bit defined in this map. If
the bit is set, it indicates that the condition is in
the OFFSPEC category (and will set the same
bit in FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE if the condition
occurs). Multiple bits can be set at the same
time.
O/S, Auto
FD_OFFSPEC_MASK
(52)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
This parameter allows the user to suppress any
single or multiple conditions that are active, in
this category, from being broadcast to the
host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal
to ‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a
condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e.
allow broadcast of a condition.
O/S, Auto
FD_OFFSPEC_PRI
(60)
0 to 15
0
[None]
This parameter allows the host system to
specify the priority of this alarm category. Set
using the control host FOUNDATION fieldbus
interface.
O/S, Auto
FD_RECOMMEN_ACT
(64)
See FD_RECOMMENDED_ACTION table.
1
Enumeration
This parameter is a device enumerated
summarization of the most severe condition
or conditions detected. The DD help should
describe by enumerated action, what should
be done to alleviate the condition or
conditions. 0 is defined as Not Initialized, 1 is
defined as No Action Required, all others
defined by manufacturer. Disabling or
masking a device condition will not have an
effect on the recommended actions.
Read-Only
FD_SIMULATE
(63)
FD_SIMULATE.1 DIAGNOSTIC_SIMULATE_VALUE;
FD_SIMULATE.2 - DIAGNOSTIC_VALUE;
FD_SIMULATE.3 - ENABLE;
[None]
This parameter allows the conditions to be
manually supplied when simulation is
enabled. When simulation is disabled both the
diagnostic simulate value and the diagnostic
value track the actual conditions. The physical
simulate switch needs to be enabled to allow
simulation to be activated in software. When
simulation is enabled, the
DIAGNOSTIC_SIMULATE_VALUE can be used
to simulate the *_ACTIVE parameters. While
simulation is enabled the recommended
action will show that simulation is active.
O/S, Auto
FD_VER
(42)
1
[None]
Reflects the value of the major version of Field
Diagnostics specification to which the device
was designed - this allows hosts to distinguish
between changes that may be necessary to be
made in such a recent specification.
Read-Only
102
1
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
Writable
mode
FEATURE_SEL
(18)
0x0000: No features selected
0x0001: Unicode strings;
0x0002: Reports supported;
0x0008: Soft Write Lock supported;
0x0010: Hard Write Lock supported;
0x0400: Multi-bit Alarm (bit-alarm)
support;
0x0800: Restart/Relink required after
using FB Action
0x0000
Enumeration
Used to select resource block options
O/S, Auto
FEATURES
(17)
0x0001: Unicode strings;
0x0002: Reports supported;
0x0008: Soft Write Lock supported;
0x0010: Hard Write Lock supported;
0x0400: Multi-bit Alarm (bit-alarm)
support;
0x0800: Restart/Relink required after
using FB Action
0x0C1B
Enumeration
Used to show supported resource block
options
Read-Only
FINAL_ASSY_NUM
(74)
32 bit number
Set at
factory; not
modifiable
[None]
The same final assembly number placed on
the neck label
O/S, Auto
FREE_SPACE
(24)
0.0 to100.0 calculated by the device
33.3333
%
Percent of memory available for further
configuration - Additional function blocks may
be instantiated if value > 0.0%
Read-Only
FREE_TIME
(25)
0.0 to100.0
Set to 0 to
indicate
parameter is
not used.
%
Percent of the block processing time that is
free to process additional blocks
Read-Only
GRANT_DENY
(14)
Indexes for subparameters of
GRANT_DENY:
1 - GRANT;
2 - DENY;
0
[None]
Options for controlling access of host
computer and local control panels to
operating, tuning and alarm parameters of
the block. See fieldbus specifications for
sub-parameters.
O/S, Auto
HARD_TYPES
(15)
0x0001 indicated the device contains at
least one AI block.
0x0001
Enumeration
The types of hardware available as channel
numbers
Read-Only
HARDWARE_
REVISION
(68)
Set at factory
Set at
factory; not
modifiable
[None]
Hardware revision of that hardware
Read-Only
HEALTH_INDEX
(76)
10, 30, 70, 90, 100
100
[None]
Represents the overall health of the device,
100 being perfect.The value will be set based
on active field diagnostic conditions.
Disabling or masking a device condition will
not have an effect on the health index.
Read-Only
ITK_VER
(41)
6
6
[None]
Major revision number of the interoperability
test case used in certifying this device as
interoperable - the format and range are
controlled by the Fieldbus Foundation.
Read-Only
LIM_NOTIFY
(32)
0 to 7
7
[None]
Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify
messages allowed
O/S, Auto
MAINT_ACTIVE
(88)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
Read-Only
MAINT_ALM
(80)
MAINT_ALM.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
MAINT_ALM.2 - ALARM_STATE;
MAINT_ALM.3 - TIME_STAMP;
MAINT_ALM.4 - SUB_CODE;
MAINT_ALM.5 - VALUE;
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
[None]
[None]
Alarm indicating the device needs
maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored,
the device will eventually fail.
Mixed
103
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
Writable
mode
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0x00108000
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_OFFSPEC_MAP
Read-Only
MAINT_MASK
(87)
0x00000000: All bits cleared
0x00000001: Check Function
0x00000008: Variation Change Detected
0x00000010: Display Update Failure
0x00008000: Sensor Temperature Out of
Limits
0x00100000: Pressure Out of Limits
0x10000000: Incompatible Module
0x20000000: Sensor Failure
0x40000000: Electronics Failure
0
Enumeration
Read Only copy of FD_OFFSPEC_MASK
Read-Only
MAINT_PRI
(85)
0 to 15
0
[None]
Designates the alarming priority of the
MAINT_ALM
O/S, Auto
MANUFAC_ID
(10)
0x00001151:Rosemount
0x00001151
Enumeration
Manufacturer identification number - used by
an interface device to locate the DD file for the
resource
Read-Only
MAX_NOTIFY
(31)
An 8-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 255
7
[None]
Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify
messages possible
Read-Only
MEMORY_SIZE
(22)
16 kilobytes
16
Kbytes
Available configuration memory in the empty
resource - to be checked before attempting a
download
Read-Only
MIN_CYCLE_T
(21)
1760 = 55 msec
1760
1/32 msec
Minimum Cycle Time - the smallest
macrocycle of time of which the device is
capable.
Read-Only
MODE_BLK
(5)
MODE_BLK.1 - TARGET;
MODE_BLK.2 - ACTUAL;
MODE_BLK.3 - PERMITTED;
MODE_BLK.4 - NORMAL;
N/A
The actual, target, permitted, and normal
modes of the block
Mixed
NV_CYCLE_T
(23)
960000= 30 seconds
960000
1/32 msec
Minimum time interval specified by the
manufacturer for writing copies of NV
parameters to non-volatile memory
Zero means it will never be automatically
copied. At the end of NV_CYCLE_TIME, only
those parameters that have changed (as
defined by the manufacturer) need to be
updated in NVRAM.
Read-Only
OUTPUT_BOARD_SN
(73)
Set at the factory
mfg_block
[None]
Output board serial number
Read-Only
PD_TAG
(70)
Supported characters defined by
FOUNDATION fieldbus specifications.
32_spaces
N/A
PD tag description of device
Read-Only
RECOMMENDED_
ACTION
(78)
See FD_RECOMMENDED_ACTION.
1
Enumeration
Read-Only copy of FD_RECOMMEN_ACT
Read-Only
RESTART
(16)
0: Uninitialized;
1: Run: is the passive state of the
parameter;
2: Restart resource: to clear up problems
like garbage collection;
3: Restart with defaults: to reset all
configurable function block application
objects to their initial value i.e. their value
before any configuration was done by the
user;
4: Restart processor: provides a way to hit
the reset button on the processor
associated with the resource;
5-10: Device specific: unused;
11: Restore Factory default blocks:
restores default blocks
i.e. manufacturer pre-instantiated blocks;
12: Reset transducer block Factory
calibration: resets transducer block
calibration to manufacturer settings
(same as STB.FACTORY_CAL_RECALL)
1
Enumeration
Allows a manual restart to be initiated or
allows values to be defaulted.
O/S, Auto
MAINT_ENABLE
(86)
104
This parameter is needed for backward
compatibility with PlantWeb Alerts.
The values 5-10 will not appear in the DD
enumeration, because they are unused.When
these values are written the only action that
will happen is this parameter will set back to a
value of 1.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-1. Resource Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
Writable
mode
RS_STATE
(7)
0: Uninitialized;
1: StartRestart;
2: Initialization;
3: Online Linking;
4: Online;
5: Standby;
6: Failure
0
Enumeration
State of the function block application state
machine
Read-Only
SET_FSTATE
(29)
0: Uninitialized;
1: Off (Normal operating)
1
Enumeration
Allows the faultstate condition to be manually
initiated by selecting Set
O/S, Auto
SHED_RCAS
(26)
A 32-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 4294967295
640000
1/32 msec
Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas
locations
O/S, Auto
SHED_ROUT
(27)
A 32-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 4294967295
640000
1/32 msec
Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut
locations
O/S, Auto
SOFTWARE_REV
(69)
Denotes software build number and
software build date
Read from
the device
[None]
Software revision of source code that has
resource block in it
Read-Only
ST_REV
(1)
A 16-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 65535
0
The revision level of the static data associated
with the function block
Read-Only
STRATEGY
(3)
A 16-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 65535
0
[None]
The strategy field can be used to identify
grouping of blocks
O/S, Auto
SWITCHES_STATE
(94)
1: Disable
2: Enable
Read from
the device
[None]
Shows the group of device specific
informational parameters related to the state
of security and simulate switchers
Read-Only
TAG_DESC
(2)
A string of bytes that can contain any
value, usually shown as pairs of hex
characters
32_spaces
[None]
The user description of the intended
application of the block
O/S, Auto
TEST_RW
(8)
TEST_RW.1 - VALUE_1;
TEST_RW.2 - VALUE_2;
TEST_RW.3 - VALUE_3;
TEST_RW.4 - VALUE_4;
TEST_RW.5 - VALUE_5;
TEST_RW.6 - VALUE_6;
TEST_RW.7 - VALUE_7;
TEST_RW.8 - VALUE_8;
TEST_RW.9 - VALUE_9;
TEST_RW.10 - VALUE_10;
TEST_RW.11 - VALUE_11;
TEST_RW.12 - VALUE_12;
TEST_RW.13 - VALUE_13;
TEST_RW.14 - VALUE_14;
TEST_RW.15 - VALUE_15;
N/A
Read/write test parameter - used only for ITK
conformance testing
O/S, Auto
UPDATE_EVT
(35)
UPDATE_EVT.1 - UNACKNOWLEDGED;
UPDATE_EVT.2 - UPDATE_STATE;
UPDATE_EVT.3 - TIME_STAMP;
UPDATE_EVT.4 - STATIC_REVISION;
UPDATE_EVT.5 - RELATIVE_INDEX;
[None]
This alert is generated by any change to the
static data - contains subfields:
UNACKNOWLEDGED, UPDATE_STATE,
TIME_STAMP, STATIC_REVISION,
RELATIVE_INDEX
Mixed
[None]
This alert is generated if the write lock
parameter is cleared - contains subfields:
UNACKNOWLEDGED, ALARM_STATE,
TIME_STAMP,
SUB_CODE
Mixed
WRITE_ALM
(40)
WRITE_LOCK
(34)
0: Uninitialized;
1: Not Locked (Writes to Parameters are
allowed);
2: Locked (Writes to Parameters are not
allowed except to WRITE_LOCK)
1
Enumeration
If set to Locked, no writes from anywhere are
allowed, except to clear WRITE_LOCK. Block
inputs will continue to be updated.
O/S, Auto
WRITE_PRI
(39)
0 to 15
0
[None]
Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the
write lock
O/S, Auto
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
105
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.2
Sensor transducer block
The transducer block contains the actual measurement data, including a pressure and
temperature reading. The transducer block includes information about sensor type, engineering
units, linearization, reranging, temperature compensation, and diagnostics.
Table A-2. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
Writeable
mode
0
N/A
The identification number of the PlantUnit
O/S, Auto
ALERT_KEY
(4)
Any value from 1-255
BLOCK_ALM
(8)
[None]
[None]
[None]
Used for all configuration, hardware,
connection failure or system problems in
the block. The cause of the alert is entered in
the subcode field. The first alert to become
active will set the Active status in the Status
attribute. As soon as the Unreported status
is cleared by the alert reporting task,
another block alert may be reported
without clearing the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
Mixed
BLOCK_ERR
(6)
0x0000:No errors 0x0001: Other (LSB)
0x8000: Out-of-Service
0x0000
Enumeration
This parameter reflects the error status
associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. It is a
bit string, so that multiple errors may be
shown.
Read-Only
CAL_MIN_SPAN
(19)
ALL
2.5
CU
(Calibration
units)
The minimum calibration span value
allowed - This minimum span information is
necessary to ensure that when calibration is
done, the two calibrated points are not too
close together.
Read-Only
CAL_POINT_HI
(17)
ALL
250
CU
(Calibration
units)
The highest calibrated value
O/S, Man
CAL_POINT_LO
(18)
ALL
0.0
CU
(Calibration
units)
The lowest calibrated value
O/S, Man
CAL_UNIT
(21)
1130: Pascals
1132: Megapascals
1133: Kilopascals
1136: Hectopascals
1137: Bar
1138: Millibar
1139: torr @ 0C
1140: Atm
1141: Psi
1144: g/cm^2
1145: kg?cm^2
1146: in H2O @ 60F
1147: in H2O @ 4C
1148: in H20 @ 68F
1150: mm H20 @ 4C
1151: mm H20 @ 68F
1152: ft H20 @ 68F
1153: ft H20 @ 4C
1154: ft H20 @ 68F
1156: in Hg @ 0C
1158: mm Hg @ 0C
1724: inH2O (60°F)
1735: cmH2O (4°C)
1736: mH2O (4°C)
1737: cmHg (0°C)
1738: psf
1739: mHg (0°C)
1750: ftH2O (60°F)
1751: kg/m^2
Enumeration
The Device Description engineering units
code index for the calibration values.
O/S, Man
CAL_VALUE
(20)
CAL_VALUE.1 - STATUS;
CAL_VALUE.2 - VALUE
[None]
The pressure value used for calibration in
CAL_UNITS
Read-Only
106
[None]
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-2. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Writeable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
0
[None]
A directory that specifies the number,
starting indices, and DD Item ID's of the data
collections in each transducer block Directory has a value of zero if only a single
data collection exists
Read-Only
252
[None]
Indicates the type of material of which the
drain vents on the flange are made
O/S
1
Enumeration
Recalls the sensor calibration set at the
factory
O/S
COLLECTION_
DIRECTORY
(13)
0
DRAIN_VENT_MTL
(44)
0 to 255
2: 316 Stainless Steel;
3: Alloy C-276;
4: Alloy 400/K-500;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
FACTORY_CAL_
RECALL
(34)
1: No Recall (always read, but can't be
written);
2: Recall
FLANGE_MTL
(38)
0 to 255
0: Carbon Steel;
2: 316 Stainless Steel;
3: Cast C-276;
4: Alloy 400/K-500;
24: K-500;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
Enumeration
Indicates the type of material of which the
flange is made
O/S
FLANGE_TYPE
(37)
0 to 255
12: Conventional (Traditional);
13: Coplanar;
14: Remote Seal;
15: Level; 3 in., 150 lb.;
16: Level; 4 in., 150 lb.;
17: Level; 3 in., 300 lb.;
18: Level; 4 in., 300 lb.;
19: Level; DN 80, PN 40;
20: Level; DN 100, PN 40;
21: Level; DN 100, PN 10/16;
22: Level; 2 in., 150 lb.;
23: Level; 2 in., 300 lb.;
24: Level; DN 50, PN 6;
25: Level; DN 50, PN 40;
44: 0.5 in NPTF;
45: DIN 16288G 1/2 A Male;
46: 0.25 in NPT;
243: 1.5” Tri-Clamp™;
244: 2” Tri-Clamp;
246: Varivent® Type F;
247: Varivent® Type N;
248: DIN 11851 DN 40;
249: DIN 11851 DN50;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
Enumeration
Indicates the type of flange that is attached
to the device
O/S
MODE_BLK
(5)
MODE_BLK.1 - TARGET;
MODE_BLK.2 - ACTUAL;
MODE_BLK.3 - PERMITTED;
MODE_BLK.4 - NORMAL
5
N/A
The actual, target, permitted, and normal
modes of the block
Mixed
MODULE_TYPE
(35)
Values:
0: Standard Coplanar (C)
1: Standard Threaded (T)
252: Unknown
252
Enumeration
Indicates the type of sensor module
Read-Only
O_RING_MTL
(43)
0 to 255
0: Undefined;
10: PTFE;
11: Viton;
12: Buna-N;
13: Ethyl-Prop;
36: PTFE Glass;
37: PTFE Graphite;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
[None]
Indicates the type of material of which the
flange O-rings are made
O/S
PRIMARY_VALUE
(15)
PRIMARY_VALUE.1 - STATUS
PRIMARY_VALUE.2- VALUE
[None]
PV range
units
Measured value and status available to the
function block
Read-Only
PRIMARY_VALUE_
DAMPING
(45)
0.4 to 60.0
0.4
Sec.
Time constant of a single exponential filter
for the PV, in seconds
O/S
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
107
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-2. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
PRIMARY_VALUE_
RANGE
(16)
PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE.1 - EU_100;
PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE.2 - EU_0;
PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE.3 UNITS_INDEX;
1130: Pascals
1132: Megapascals
1133: Kilopascals
1136: Hectopascals
1137: Bar
1138: Millibar
1139: torr @ 0C
1140: Atm
1141: Psi
1144: g/cm^2
1145: kg?cm^2
1146: in H2O @ 60F
1147: in H2O @ 4C
1148: in H20 @ 68F
1150: mm H20 @ 4C
1151: mm H20 @ 68F
1152: ft H20 @ 68F
1153: ft H20 @ 4C
1154: ft H20 @ 68F
1156: in Hg @ 0C
1158: mm Hg @ 0C
1724: inH2O (60°F)
1735: cmH2O (4°C)
1736: mH2O (4°C)
1737: cmHg (0°C)
1738: psf
1739: mHg (0°C)
1750: ftH2O (60°F)
1751: kg/m^2
PRIMARY_VALUE_
TYPE
(14)
107: differential pressure;
108: gauge pressure;
109: absolute pressure;
65535: other;
Writeable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
[None]
PVR
The high and low range limit values,
engineering units code, and number of
digits to the right of the decimal point to be
used to display the final value
Read-Only
107, 108, or
109
depending
on
assembled
sensor type
Enumeration
The type of measurement represented by
the primary value - Can only write the same
value as the current value
O/S
[None]
[None]
Used to store the upper and lower scale
gauge limits
O/S, Auto,
Manual
PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE.4 - DECIMAL
Note: Can only write the same value as the
current value
PV_GAUGE_SCALE
(46)
[None]
REM_SEAL_FILL
(42)
0 to 255
2: Silicone oil;
3: Syltherm 800;
4: Inert (Halocarbon™);
5: Glycerin and Water;
6: Propylene Glycol and Water;
7: Neobee M-20;
8: Syltherm XLT;
10: D.C. Silicone 704;
14: D.C. Silicone 200;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special;
252
[None]
Indicates the type of fill fluid used in the
remote seals
O/S
REM_SEAL_ISO_
MTL
(41)
0 to 255
2: 316L Stainless Steel
3: Alloy C-276
4: Alloy 400
5: Tantalum
9: Co-Cr-Ni
34: PTFE Coated 316L SST
240: Nickel 201
251: None
252: Unknown
253: Special
252
[None]
Indicates the type of material of which the
remote seal isolators are made
O/S
108
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-2. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Writeable
mode
Valid range
Initial value
Units
Description
REM_SEAL_NUM
(39)
0 to 255
0: Undefined;
1: One Seal;
2: Two Seals;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special;
252
Enumeration
Indicates the number of remote seals
attached to the device
O/S
REM_SEAL_TYPE
(40)
0 to 255
0: Undefined;
1: Reserved;
2: CTW;
3: EFW (Expanded Flange Seal);
4: PFW (Pancake);
5: RFW (Flanged Remote);
6: RTW (Threaded Remote);
7: SCW;
8: SSW;
9: High Temperature;
10: FFW Flanged Flush Surface;
11: UCW;
12: TSW;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
[None]
Indicates the type of remote seals attached
to the device
O/S
SECONDARY_
VALUE
(32)
SECONDARY_VALUE.1 - STATUS;
SECONDARY_VALUE.2 - VALUE
[None]
[None]
Secondary value, related to the sensor
Read-Only
SECONDARY_
VALUE_UNIT
(33)
1001: Deg C
1002: Deg F
1001
Enumeration
Engineering units to be used with the
SECONDARY_VALUE
Read-Only
SENSOR_CAL_
DATE
(28)
ALL
0
[None]
The date of the last sensor calibration - This
is intended to reflect the calibration of that
part of the sensor that is usually wetted by
the process.
O/S, Man
SENSOR_CAL_LOC
(27)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The location of the last sensor calibration This describes the physical location at which
the calibration was performed.
O/S, Man
SENSOR_CAL_
METHOD
(26)
0: Uninitialized
100: Volumetric;
101: Static Weigh;
102: Dynamic Weigh;
103: Factory Trim Standard Calibration;
104: User Trim Standard Calibration;
105: Factory Trim Special Calibration;
106: User Trim Special Calibration;
255: Other
0
Enumeration
The method of last sensor calibration - It
could be one of the several standard
calibration methods defined by ISO or some
other method.
O/S, Man
SENSOR_CAL_TYPE
(36)
Values:
0: Differential Pressure
1: Gauge Pressure
2: Absolute Pressure
0
Enumeration
The type of last sensor calibration
O/S, Man
SENSOR_CAL_
WHO
(29)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The name of the person responsible for the
last sensor calibration
O/S, Man
SENSOR_FILL_
FLUID
(31)
0 to 255;
0: Undefined;
1: Silicone;
2: Inert;
3: Undefined;
7: Neobee;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
Enumeration
Defines the type of fill fluid used in the
sensor - For UI purposes only (no effect on
device behavior)
Read-Only
SENSOR_ISOLATOR
_MTL
(30)
0 to 255;
0: Undefined;
2: 316 Stainless Steel;
3: Alloy C-276;
4: Alloy 400;
5: Tantalum;
15: Gold-Plated Alloy 400;
34: Gold-Plated 316L SST;
251: None;
252: Unknown;
253: Special
252
Enumeration
Defines the construction material for the
isolating diaphragms - For UI purposes only
(no effect on device behavior)
Read-Only
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
109
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-2. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
SENSOR_RANGE
(24)
SENSOR_RANGE.1 - EU_100;
SENSOR_RANGE.2 - EU_0;
SENSOR_RANGE.3 - UNITS_INDEX;
1130: Pascals
1132: Megapascals
1133: Kilopascals
1136: Hectopascals
1137: Bar
1138: Millibar
1139: torr @ 0C
1140: Atm
1141: Psi
1144: g/cm^2
1145: kg?cm^2
1146: in H2O @ 60F
1147: in H2O @ 4C
1148: in H20 @ 68F
1150: mm H20 @ 4C
1151: mm H20 @ 68F
1152: ft H20 @ 68F
1153: ft H20 @ 4C
1154: ft H20 @ 68F
1156: in Hg @ 0C
1158: mm Hg @ 0C
1724: inH2O (60°F)
1735: cmH2O (4°C)
1736: mH2O (4°C)
1737: cmHg (0°C)
1738: psf
1739: mHg (0°C)
1750: ftH2O (60°F)
1751: kg/m^2
SENSOR_RANGE.4 - DECIMAL;
SENSOR_SN
(25)
ALL
SENSOR_TYPE
(23)
117: Capacitive (DP sensor);
121: Pressure sensor unknown (for no
sensor attached);
124 - Strain gauge (AP or GP sensor);
Writeable
mode
Initial value
Units
Description
[None]
SR
The high and low range limit values,
engineering units code. and number of
digits to the right of the decimal point for
the sensor
Read-Only
“16777215”
[None]
The sensor serial number
Read-Only
117, 124
Enumeration
The type of sensor connected with the
transducer block - Can only write the same
value as the current value
O/S
Note: Can only write the same value as the
current value
ST_REV
(1)
A 16-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 65535
0
N/A
The revision level of the static data
associated with the function block
Read-Only
STRATEGY
(3)
A 16-bit unsigned integer capable of
holding values 0 to 65535
0
N/A
The strategy field can be used to identify
grouping of blocks
O/S, Auto
TAG_DESC
(2)
A string of bytes that can contain any value,
usually shown as pairs of hex characters
32_spaces
N/A
The user description of the intended
application of the block
O/S, Auto
TRANSDUCER_
DIRECTORY
(9)
0
0
[None]
A directory that specifies the number and
starting indicies of the transducers in the
transducer block
Read-Only
TRANSDUCER_
TYPE
(10)
100= standard pressure with calibration
100
Enumeration
Identifies the transducer that follows
Read-Only
TRANSDUCER_
TYPE_VER
(11)
0x0201
02 = Revision of FF-903
01=Rosemount revision
0x0201
[None]
The version of the transducer identified by
TRANSDUCER_TYPE in the form 0xAABB
where AA is the major revision of the
transducer specification on which the
transducer is based, and BB is a revision
number assigned and controlled by the
manufacturer of the device.
Read-Only
UPDATE_EVT
(7)
[None]
[None]
[None]
This alert is generated by any change to the
static data. Contains subfield:
UNACKNOWLEDGED, UPDATE_STATE,
TIME_STAMP, STATIC_REVISION,
RELATIVE_INDEX
Mixed
XD_ERROR
(12)
0= No error
22= I/O failure
0
Enumeration
Provides additional error codes related to
transducer blocks
Read-Only
XD_OPTS
(22)
0x00000000: No bits set
0x00000001: Input Status Bad in Manual
0x00000002: Input Status Uncertain in
Manual
0x00000000
Enumeration
Options the user may select to alter
transducer behavior when the block is in
manual mode.
O/S
110
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.3
Analog input (AI) function block
The Analog Input (AI) function block processes field device measurements and makes them
available to other function blocks. The output value from the AI block is in engineering units and
contains a status indicating the quality of the measurement. The measuring device may have
several measurements or derived values available in different channels. Use the channel number
to define the variable that the AI block processes.
The AI block supports alarming, signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status calculation, mode
control, and simulation. In Automatic mode, the block’s output parameter (OUT) reflects the
process variable (PV) value and status. In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual
mode is reflected on the output status. A discrete output (OUT_D) is provided to indicate
whether a selected alarm condition is active. Alarm detection is based on the OUT value and
user specified alarm limits. Figure A-1 illustrates the internal components of the AI function
block, and Table A-3 lists the AI block parameters and their units of measure, descriptions, and
index numbers.
Figure A-1. AI Block Internal Components
Channel
Standard
Deviation
Calculation
ALM_SEL
HI_HI LIM
HI_LIM
LO_LO LIM
LO_LIM
ALARM_HYS
OUT_D
Alarm
Direction
Direct
XD_
Scale
Indirect
Indirect
Cutoff
Range
A.3.1
Filter
OUT_
Scale
Range
Auto
PV
Manual
Status
Calc.
OUT
OOS
PV_FTIME
AI parameter table
Table A-3. Definitions of Analog Input Function Block System Parameters
Parameter
Available values
Units
Default
Read/write
Description
ACK_OPTION
0 = Auto Ack Disabled
1 = Auto Ack Enabled
None
0 all Disabled
Read and Write
Used to set auto acknowledgment of alarms
ALARM_HYS
0 – 50
Percent
0.5
Read and Write
The amount the alarm value must return
within the alarm limit before the associated
active alarm condition clears.
ALARM_SEL
HI_HI, HI, LO, LO_LO
None
Non selected
Read and Write
Used to select the process alarm conditions
that will cause the OUT_D parameter to be
set.
ALARM_SUM
Enable/Disable
None
Enable
Read and Write
The summary alarm is used for all process
alarms in the block. The cause of the alert is
entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the
Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task,
another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode
has changed.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
111
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-3. Definitions of Analog Input Function Block System Parameters
Parameter
Available values
Units
Default
Read/write
Description
ALERT_KEY
1 – 255
None
0
Read and Write
The identification number of the plant unit.
This information may be used in the host for
sorting alarms, etc.
BLOCK_ALM
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
The block alarm is used for all configuration,
hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is
entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the
Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task,
another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has
changed.
BLOCK_ERR
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
This parameter reflects the error status
associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. It is a bit
string, so that multiple errors may be shown.
CAP_STDDEV
>=0
Seconds
0
Read and Write
The time over which the VAR_INDEX is
evaluated.
CHANNEL
1 = Pressure
2 = Housing
temperature
None
AI(1): Channel = 1
AI2: Channel = 2
Read and Write
The CHANNEL value is used to select the
measurement value. Refer to the appropriate
device manual for information about the
specific channels available in each device.
You must configure the CHANNEL parameter
before you can configure the XD_SCALE
parameter.
FIELD_VAL
0 – 100
Percent
N/A
Read-Only
The value and status from the transducer
block or from the simulated input when
simulation is enabled.
GRANT_DENY
Program
Tune
Alarm
Local
None
N/A
Read and Write
Normally the operator has permission to write
to parameter values, but Program or Local
remove that permission and give it to the host
controller or a local control panel.
HI_ALM
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
The HI alarm data, which includes a value of
the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and the
state of the alarm.
HI_HI_ALM
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of
the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and the
state of the alarm.
HI_HI_LIM
Out_Scale
Out_Scale(2)
N/A
Read and Write
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect
the HI HI alarm condition.
HI_HI_PRI
0 – 15
None
1
Read and Write
The priority of the HI HI alarm.
N/A
Read and Write
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect
the HI alarm condition.
(2)
(2)
(2)
HI_LIM
Out_Scale
HI_PRI
0 – 15
None
1
Read and Write
The priority of the HI alarm.
IO_OPTS
Low Cutoff
Enable/Disable
None
Disable
Read and Write
Allows the selection of input/output options
used to alter the PV. Low cutoff enabled is the
only selectable option.
L_TYPE
Direct
Indirect
Indirect Square Root
None
Direct
Read and Write
Linearization type. Determines whether the
field value is used directly (Direct), is
converted linearly (Indirect), or is converted
with the square root (Indirect Square Root).
LO_ALM
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
The LO alarm data, which includes a value of
the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and the
state of the alarm.
LO_LIM
Out_Scale
N/A
Read and Write
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect
the LO alarm condition.
LO_LO_ALM
N/A
N/A
Read-Only
The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value
of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and
the state of the alarm.
LO_LO_LIM
Out_Scale
N/A
Read and Write
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect
the LO LO alarm condition.
LO_LO_PRI
0 – 15
1
Read and Write
The priority of the LO LO alarm.
112
(2)
Out_Scale
(2)
Out_Scale
None
(2)
(2)
Out_Scale
None
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-3. Definitions of Analog Input Function Block System Parameters
Parameter
Available values
LO_PRI
0 – 15
LOW_CUT
>=0
MODE_BLK
Auto
Manual
Out of Service
OUT
Out_Scale
OUT_D
Discrete_State 1 – 16
OUT_SCALE
Units
Default
Read/write
1
Read and Write
The priority of the LO alarm.
0
Read and Write
If percentage value of transducer input fails
below this, PV = 0.
N/A
Read and Write
The actual, target, permitted, and normal
modes of the block.
Target: The mode to “go to”
Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
Permitted: Allowed modes that target may
take on
Normal: Most common mode for target
N/A
Read and Write
The block output value and status.
None
Disabled
Read and Write
Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm
condition.
Any output range
All available
none
Read and Write
The high and low scale values, engineering
units code, and number of digits to the right
of the decimal point associated with OUT.
PV
N/A
Out_Scale
(2)
N/A
Read-Only
The process variable used in block execution.
PV_FTIME
>=0
Seconds
0
Read and Write
The time constant of the first-order PV filter. It
is the time required for a 63% change in the IN
value.
SIMULATE
N/A
None
Disable
Read and Write
A group of data that contains the current
transducer value and status, the simulated
transducer value and status, and the
enable/disable bit.
ST_REV
N/A
None
0
Read-Only
The revision level of the static data associated
with the function block. The revision value will
be incremented each time a static parameter
value in the block is changed.
STATUS_OPTS
Propagate fault forward
Uncertain if Limited
Bad if Limited
Uncertain if Man Mode
0
Read and Write
STDDEV
0 – 100
Percent
0
Read and Write
The average absolute error between the PV
and its previous mean value over that
evaluation time defined by VAR_SCAN.
STRATEGY
0 – 65535
None
0
Read and Write
The strategy field can be used to identify
grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or
processed by the block.
TAG_DESC
32 text characters
None
none
Read and Write
The user description of the intended
application of the block.
UPDATE_EVT
N/A
None
N/A
Read-Only
This alert is generated by any change to the
static data.
None
(2)
Out_Scale
(2)
± 10%
None
(2)
Out_Scale
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Description
113
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-3. Definitions of Analog Input Function Block System Parameters
Parameter
XD_SCALE
Available values
Any sensor range
Units
1130: Pascals
1132: Megapascals
1133: Kilopascals
1136: Hectopascals
1137: Bar
1138: Millibar
1139: torr @ 0C
1140: Atm
1141: Psi
1144: g/cm^2
1145: kg/cm^2
1146: in H2O @ 60F
1147: in H20 @ 4C
1148: in H2O @ 68F
1150: mm H2O @ 4C
1151: mm H2O @ 68F
1152: ft H2O @ 60F
1153: ft H2O @ 4C
1154: ft H2O @ 68F
1156: in Hg @ 0C
1158: mm Hg @ 0C
1724: inH2O (60°F)
1735: cmH2O (4°C)
1736: mH2O (4°C)
1737: cmHg (0°C)
1738: psf
Default
Read/write
(1)
AI1 : Customer
specification
Description
In all Rosemount devices the units of the
transducer block is forced to match the unit
code.
or
inH2O (68 °F) for
DP/GP rng 1, 2, 3)
or
psi for DP/GP rng 4, 5
AP/2051T all rng
AI2 deg C
(1) The host system may write over default values pre-configured by Rosemount Inc.
(2) Assume that when L_Type = Direct, the user configures Out_Scale which is equal to XD_Scale
114
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.4
LCD display transducer block
Table A-4. LCD Display Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial
value
Units
Description
Writeable
mode
BLK_TAG_1
(16)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The tag of the block containing Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #1. Block
Tag -- a string of 1-32 characters that uniquely
identifies each block. BLK_TAG_1 value should
match existing block tag in the device and any
other values will cause error. The combination
of the BLK_TAG_1 and PARAM_INDEX_1 are
used to uniquely identify the specific
parameter in the device that will be displayed.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TAG_2
(22)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The tag of the block containing Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #2. Block
Tag -- a string of 1-32 characters that uniquely
identifies each block. BLK_TAG_2 value should
match existing block tag in the device and any
other values will cause error. The combination
of the BLK_TAG_2 and PARAM_INDEX_2 are
used to uniquely identify the specific
parameter in the device that will be displayed.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TAG_3
(28)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The tag of the block containing Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #3. Block
Tag -- a string of 1-32 characters that uniquely
identifies each block. BLK_TAG_3 value should
match existing block tag in the device and any
other values will cause error. The combination
of the BLK_TAG_3 and PARAM_INDEX_3 are
used to uniquely identify the specific
parameter in the device that will be displayed.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TAG_4
(34)
ALL
32_spaces
[None]
The tag of the block containing Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #4. Block
Tag -- a string of 1-32 characters that uniquely
identifies each block. BLK_TAG_4 value should
match existing block tag in the device and any
other values will cause error.The combination
of the BLK_TAG_4 and PARAM_INDEX_4 are
used to uniquely identify the specific
parameter in the device that will be displayed.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TYPE_1
(15)
0x0000: Uninitialized
0x0101: AI Block
0x0108: PID Block
0x011D: Signal Characterizer Block
0x0120: Integrator Block
0x0126: Input Selector Block
0x0127: Arithmetic Block
0x010A: Control Selector
0x011C: Output Splitter
0x0000
Enumeration
Specifies the enumerated block type from
which the Advanced Config - Display Parameter
1 (DP1) will read its displayed value from. The
value of BLK_TYPE_1 is used by the conditional
DD to reduce the list of parameter indices in
PARAM_INDEX_1 to only those that are valid
for the type of block selected.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TYPE_2
(21)
ALL
2.5
Enumeration
Specifies the enumerated block type from
which the Advanced Config - Display Parameter
2 (DP2) will read its displayed value from. The
value of BLK_TYPE_2 is used by the conditional
DD to reduce the list of parameter indices in
PARAM_INDEX_2 to only those that are valid
for the type of block selected.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TYPE_3
(27)
ALL
2.5
Enumeration
Specifies the enumerated block type from
which the Advanced Config - Display Parameter
3 (DP3) will read its displayed value from. The
value of BLK_TYPE_3 is used by the conditional
DD to reduce the list of parameter indices in
PARAM_INDEX_3 to only those that are valid
for the type of block selected.
O/S, Auto
BLK_TYPE_4
(33)
ALL
2.5
Enumeration
Specifies the enumerated block type from
which the Advanced Config - Display Parameter
4 (DP4) will read its displayed value from. The
value of BLK_TYPE_4 is used by the conditional
DD to reduce the list of parameter indices in
PARAM_INDEX_4 to only those that are valid
for the type of block selected.
O/S, Auto
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
115
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-4. LCD Display Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial
value
Units
Description
Writeable
mode
2.5
[None]
The block alarm is used for all configuration,
hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is
entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the
Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task,
another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has
changed.
Mixed
0
[None]
A directory that specifies the number, starting
indices, and DD Item ID's of the data collections
in each transducer block.
Directory has a value of zero if only a single data
collection exists.
Read-Only
BLOCK_ALM
(8)
ALL
COLLECTION_DIRECTORY
(13)
0
CUSTOM_TAG_1
(18)
ALL
PARAM1
[None]
The block description displayed for DP1 (See
DISPLAY_PARAM_SEL)
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_TAG_2
(24)
ALL
PARAM2
[None]
The block description displayed for Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #2 (See
DISPLAY_PARAM_SEL)
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_TAG_3
(30)
ALL
PARAM3
[None]
The block description displayed for Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #3 (See
DISPLAY_PARAM_SEL)
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_TAG_4
(36)
ALL
PARAM4
[None]
The block description displayed for Advanced
Config Display Parameter (DP) slot #4 (See
DISPLAY_PARAM_SEL)
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_UNITS_1
(20)
ALL
5_spaces
[None]
User entered units displayed when
UNITS_TYPE_1 are set to Custom
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_UNITS_2
(26)
ALL
5_spaces
[None]
User entered units that are displayed when
UNITS_TYPE_2 are set to Custom
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_UNITS_3
(32)
ALL
5_spaces
[None]
User entered units that are displayed when
UNITS_TYPE_3 are set to Custom
O/S, Auto
CUSTOM_UNITS_4
(38)
ALL
5_spaces
[None]
User entered units that are displayed when
UNITS_TYPE_4 are set to Custom
O/S, Auto
DISPLAY_PARAM_SEL
(14)
0x0001: Basic config - Pressure
(sensor tblk PRIMARY_VALUE)
0x0002: Basic config - Sensor
Temperature (sensor tblk
SECONDARY_VALUE)
0x0004: Basic config - Pressure
percent of range (% AI.OUT)
0x0008: Basic config - Pressure
scaled (AI.OUT)
0x0100: Advanced config - DP1
0x0200: Advanced config - DP2
0x0400: Advanced config - DP3
0x0800: Advanced config - DP4
0x0001
Enumeration
“Basic” configuration involves specifying an
internal value that the user wants displayed
(pressure, sensor temp, % of AI.OUT, AI.OUT).
O/S, Auto
116
“Advanced” configuration involves specifying
parameters from function blocks for display.
DP1 is Display Parameter 1.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-4. LCD Display Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
PARAM_INDEX_1
(17)
PARAM_INDEX_2
(23)
Initial
value
Units
Description
0: Not Initialized
7: AI.PV, PID.PV, CHAR.OUT_1,
ARITH.PV, OSPL.SP, ISEL.OUT,
CSEL.OUT
8: AI.OUT, PID.SP, CHAR.OUT_2,
ARITH.OUT, OSPL.OUT_1, INTG.OUT
9: PID.OUT, ARITH.PRE_OUT,
OSPL.OUT_2
11: ISEL.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_1
12: ISEL.IN_2, CHAR.IN_1,
INTG.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_2
13: ISEL.IN_3, CHAR.IN_2,
INTG.IN_2, CSEL.SEL_3
14: ISEL.IN_4, ARITH.IN,
OSPL.CAS_IN
15: PID.IN, ARITH.IN_LO,
OSPL.BKCAL_OUT, CSEL.BKCAL_IN
16: ARITH.IN_1
17: ARITH.IN_2
18: PID.CAS_IN, ARITH.IN_3,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_1
19: AI.FIELD_VAL, OSPL.BKCAL_IN_1,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_2
20: OSPL.BKCAL_IN_2,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_3
25: ISEL.IN_5
26: ISEL.IN_6
27: PID.BKCAL_IN, ISEL.IN_7
28: ISEL.IN_8
31: PID.BKCAL_OUT
32: PID.RCAS_IN
33: PID.ROUT_IN
35: PID.RCAS_OUT
36: PID.ROUT_OUT
39: PID.TRK_VAL
40: PID.FF_VAL
0
Enumeration
The parameter for Advanced Config Display
Parameter (DP) slot #1. Each value corresponds
to parameter selected by BLK_TAG_1 block to
be displayed.The value of BLK_TYPE_1 is used
by the conditional DD to reduce the list of
parameter indices in PARAM_INDEX_1 to only
those that are valid for the type of block
selected.
0: Not Initialized
7: AI.PV, PID.PV, CHAR.OUT_1,
ARITH.PV, OSPL.SP, ISEL.OUT,
CSEL.OUT
8: AI.OUT, PID.SP, CHAR.OUT_2,
ARITH.OUT, OSPL.OUT_1, INTG.OUT
9: PID.OUT, ARITH.PRE_OUT,
OSPL.OUT_2
11: ISEL.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_1
12: ISEL.IN_2, CHAR.IN_1,
INTG.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_2
13: ISEL.IN_3, CHAR.IN_2,
INTG.IN_2, CSEL.SEL_3
14: ISEL.IN_4, ARITH.IN,
OSPL.CAS_IN
15: PID.IN, ARITH.IN_LO,
OSPL.BKCAL_OUT, CSEL.BKCAL_IN
16: ARITH.IN_1
17: ARITH.IN_2
18: PID.CAS_IN, ARITH.IN_3,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_1
19: AI.FIELD_VAL, OSPL.BKCAL_IN_1,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_2
20: OSPL.BKCAL_IN_2,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_3
25: ISEL.IN_5
26: ISEL.IN_6
27: PID.BKCAL_IN, ISEL.IN_7
28: ISEL.IN_8
31: PID.BKCAL_OUT
32: PID.RCAS_IN
33: PID.ROUT_IN
35: PID.RCAS_OUT
36: PID.ROUT_OUT
39: PID.TRK_VAL
40: PID.FF_VAL
PARAM1
Valid range
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Writeable
mode
O/S, Auto
The combination of block type, block tag, and
parameter index are used to determine the
parameter to display on the LCD display.
Enumeration
The parameter for Advanced Config Display
Parameter (DP) slot #2. Each value corresponds
to parameter selected by BLK_TAG_2 block to
be displayed.The value of BLK_TYPE_2 is used
by the conditional DD to reduce the list of
parameter indices in PARAM_INDEX_2 to only
those that are valid for the type of block
selected.
O/S, Auto
The combination of block type, block tag, and
parameter index are used to determine the
parameter to display on the LCD display.
117
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-4. LCD Display Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
PARAM_INDEX_3
(29)
PARAM_INDEX_4
(35)
PRESSURE_SCALED_UNITS
(39)
118
Initial
value
Units
Description
0: Not Initialized
7: AI.PV, PID.PV, CHAR.OUT_1,
ARITH.PV, OSPL.SP, ISEL.OUT,
CSEL.OUT
8: AI.OUT, PID.SP, CHAR.OUT_2,
ARITH.OUT, OSPL.OUT_1, INTG.OUT
9: PID.OUT, ARITH.PRE_OUT,
OSPL.OUT_2
11: ISEL.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_1
12: ISEL.IN_2, CHAR.IN_1,
INTG.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_2
13: ISEL.IN_3, CHAR.IN_2,
INTG.IN_2, CSEL.SEL_3
14: ISEL.IN_4, ARITH.IN,
OSPL.CAS_IN
15: PID.IN, ARITH.IN_LO,
OSPL.BKCAL_OUT, CSEL.BKCAL_IN
16: ARITH.IN_1
17: ARITH.IN_2
18: PID.CAS_IN, ARITH.IN_3,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_1
19: AI.FIELD_VAL, OSPL.BKCAL_IN_1,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_2
20: OSPL.BKCAL_IN_2,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_3
25: ISEL.IN_5
26: ISEL.IN_6
27: PID.BKCAL_IN, ISEL.IN_7
28: ISEL.IN_8
31: PID.BKCAL_OUT
32: PID.RCAS_IN
33: PID.ROUT_IN
35: PID.RCAS_OUT
36: PID.ROUT_OUT
39: PID.TRK_VAL
40: PID.FF_VAL
PARAM1
Enumeration
The parameter for Advanced Config Display
Parameter (DP) slot #3. Each value corresponds
to parameter selected by BLK_TAG_3 block to
be displayed.The value of BLK_TYPE_3 is used
by the conditional DD to reduce the list of
parameter indices in PARAM_INDEX_3 to only
those that are valid for the type of block
selected.
0: Not Initialized
7: AI.PV, PID.PV, CHAR.OUT_1,
ARITH.PV, OSPL.SP, ISEL.OUT,
CSEL.OUT
8: AI.OUT, PID.SP, CHAR.OUT_2,
ARITH.OUT, OSPL.OUT_1, INTG.OUT
9: PID.OUT, ARITH.PRE_OUT,
OSPL.OUT_2
11: ISEL.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_1
12: ISEL.IN_2, CHAR.IN_1,
INTG.IN_1, CSEL.SEL_2
13: ISEL.IN_3, CHAR.IN_2,
INTG.IN_2, CSEL.SEL_3
14: ISEL.IN_4, ARITH.IN,
OSPL.CAS_IN
15: PID.IN, ARITH.IN_LO,
OSPL.BKCAL_OUT, CSEL.BKCAL_IN
16: ARITH.IN_1
17: ARITH.IN_2
18: PID.CAS_IN, ARITH.IN_3,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_1
19: AI.FIELD_VAL, OSPL.BKCAL_IN_1,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_2
20: OSPL.BKCAL_IN_2,
CSEL.BKCAL_SEL_3
25: ISEL.IN_5
26: ISEL.IN_6
27: PID.BKCAL_IN, ISEL.IN_7
28: ISEL.IN_8
31: PID.BKCAL_OUT
32: PID.RCAS_IN
33: PID.ROUT_IN
35: PID.RCAS_OUT
36: PID.ROUT_OUT
39: PID.TRK_VAL
40: PID.FF_VAL
PARAM1
5 character alphanumeric string
“CUSTM”
Valid range
Writeable
mode
O/S, Auto
The combination of block type, block tag, and
parameter index are used to determine the
parameter to display on the LCD display.
Enumeration
The parameter for Advanced Config Display
Parameter (DP) slot #4. Each value corresponds
to parameter selected by BLK_TAG_4 block to
be displayed.The value of BLK_TYPE_4 is used
by the conditional DD to reduce the list of
parameter indices in PARAM_INDEX_4 to only
those that are valid for the type of block
selected.
O/S, Auto
The combination of block type, block tag, and
parameter index are used to determine the
parameter to display on the LCD display.
[None]
User entered units displayed for the Basic config
- Pressure Scaled Value Units Screen
O/S, Auto
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-4. LCD Display Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter
(index number)
Valid range
Initial
value
Units
Description
Writeable
mode
0
[None]
Directory that specifies the number and
starting indices of the transducers in the
transducer block
Read-Only
TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY
(9)
0
TRANSDUCER_TYPE
(10)
65535
65535
Enumeration
Identifies the transducer that follows
Read-Only
TRANSDUCER_TYPE_VER
(11)
0x0001
0x0001
[None]
The version of the transducer identified by
TRANSDUCER_TYPE in the form 0xAABB where
AA is the major revision of the transducer
specification on which the transducer is based,
and BB is a revision number assigned and
controlled by the manufacturer of the device
Read-Only
UNITS_TYPE_1
(19)
1: Auto (units come from associated
block parameter);
2: Custom (See CUSTOM_UNITS_1);
3: None (units are not displayed)
1
Enumeration
Determines where the units for the display
parameter come from
O/S, Auto
UNITS_TYPE_2
(25)
1: Auto (units come from associated
block parameter);
2: Custom (See CUSTOM_UNITS_2);
3: None (units are not displayed)
1
Enumeration
Determines where the units for the display
parameter come from
O/S, Auto
UNITS_TYPE_3
(31)
1: Auto (units come from associated
block parameter);
2: Custom (See CUSTOM_UNITS_3);
3: None (units are not displayed)
1
Enumeration
Determines where the units for the display
parameter come from
O/S, Auto
UNITS_TYPE_4
(37)
1: Auto (units come from associated
block parameter);
2: Custom (See CUSTOM_UNITS_4);
3: None (units are not displayed)
1
Enumeration
Determines where the units for the display
parameter come from
O/S, Auto
UPDATE_EVT
(7)
[None]
[None]
[None]
Alert generated by any change to the static
data
Mixed
XD_ERROR
(12)
0: No Error
19: Configuration Error
22: I/O Failure (An I/O failure has
occurred)
0
Enumeration
Indicates the most important error in the LCD
display transducer block
Read-Only
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
119
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.5
Performance specifications
These specifications cover HART®, Wireless, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and PROFIBUS® PA protocols
unless specified.
A.5.1
Conformance to specification (±3 [Sigma])
Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques, and statistical process control
ensure specification conformance to at least ±3.
A.5.2
Reference accuracy
Stated reference accuracy equations include terminal based linearity, hysteresis, and
repeatability. For Wireless, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and PROFIBUS PA devices, use calibrated range
in place of span.
Models
Standard
High performance option, P8
2051C
±0.10% of span
For spans less than 15:1, accuracy =
Range 1
URL
 0.025 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
±0.065% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
Ranges 2-4
URL
 0.025 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
±0.075% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy=
Range 5
2051T
Ranges 1-4
URL
 0.025 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
N/A N/A
High Accuracy Option, P8
±0.05% of span
(1)
Ranges 2-4 For spans less than 10:1 , accuracy =
URL
 0.015 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
High Performance Option, P8
±0.065% of span
Range 5 For spans less than 10:1, accuracy=
URL
 0.015 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
±0.065% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
URL
 0.0075  --------------- % of Span
 Span
Ranges 1-4
High Accuracy Option, P8
±0.05% of span
For spans less than 10:1(1), accuracy =
URL
 0.0075  --------------- % of Span
 Span
±0.075% of span
For spans less than 10:1,
Range 5
accuracy =  .0075  --------------- % of Span
URL
Span
±0.075% of span
2051L
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
Ranges 2-4
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
URL
 0.025 + 0.005  --------------- % of Span
 Span
(1) For protocol code F, accuracy specification is for spans less than 7:1.
120
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Flow performance - Flow reference accuracy
2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter
Ranges 2-3
±2.00% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
2051CFC Compact Orifice Flowmeter – conditioning option C
Ranges 2-3
 =0.4
±2.25% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
 =0.50, 0.65
±2.45% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
2051CFC Compact Orifice Flowmeter – orifice type option P(1)
Ranges 2-3
 =0.4
±2.50% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
 =0.65
±2.50% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Ranges 2-3
 <0.1
±3.10% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
0.1<  <0.2
±2.75% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
0.2<  <0.6
±2.25% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
0.6<  <0.8
±3.00% of Flow Rate at 5:1 flow turndown
(1) For smaller line sizes, see Rosemount Compact Orifice
Long term stability
± 50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.
Models
Standard
High performance option, P8
2051C
Range 1 (CD) ±0.2% of URL for 1 year
Ranges 2-5 ±0.1% of URL for 3 years
±0.125% of URL for 5 years
Ranges 1-5 ±0.1% of URL for 3 years
±0.125% of URL for 5 years
2051T
Dynamic performance
4-20 mA HART(1)
1-5 Vdc HART Low
Power
FOUNDATION
fieldbus and
PROFIBUS PA
protocols (2)
Typical HART transmitter response
time
Total Response Time (Td + Tc)(3):
2051C, Range 3-5:
Range 1:
Range 2:
2051T:
2051L:
Transmitter Output vs. Time
115 ms
270 ms
130 ms
100 ms
See Instrument Toolkit™
152 ms
307 ms
152 ms
152 ms
See Instrument Toolkit
Dead Time (Td)
60 ms (nominal)
97 ms
Update Rate(4)
22 times per second
22 times per second
Pressure Released
Td
100%
Tc
Td = Dead Time
Tc = Time Constant
Response Time = Td +Tc
63.2% of Total
Step Change
36.8%
0%
Time
(1) Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only.
(2) Transducer block response time, Analog Input block execution time not included.
(3) Nominal total response time at 75 °F (24 °C) reference conditions.
(4) Does not apply to wireless (Output Code X). See <Footnote_ref>“PROFIBUS PA (Output Code W)” on page 127 for wireless update rate.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
121
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Line pressure effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa)
For line pressures above 2000 psi (13,7 MPa) and Ranges 4-5, see user manual (document number 00809-0100-4001 for HART,
00809-0100-4102 for WirelessHART®, 00809-0100-4774 for FOUNDATION fieldbus, and 00809-0300-4101 for PROFIBUS PA)
Models
Line pressure effect
2051CD, 2051CF
Zero Error(1)
Range 1
±0.25% of URL/1000 psi (68.9 bar)
Ranges 2-3
±0.05% of URL/1000 psi (68.9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13.7 MPa)
Span Error
Range 1
±0.4% of reading/1,000 psi (68.9 bar)
Ranges 2-3
±0.1% of reading/1,000 psi (68.9 bar)
(1) Can be calibrated out at line pressure.
Ambient temperature effect per 50 °F (28 °C)
Models
Ambient temperature effect
High performance option, P8
2051C, 2051CF
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 5:1
±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 5:1 to 100:1
Range 1 ±(0.1% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
±(0.0125% URL + 0.0625% span) from 1:1 to 5:1
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 5:1 to 100:1
±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
±(0.07% URL + 0.25% span) from 30:1 to 100:1
±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 10:1
Range 1
±(0.10% URL + 0.25% span) from 10:1 to 100:1
Range 5 ±(0.1% URL + 0.15% span)
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
±(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 10:1
±(0.05% URL + 0.125% span) from 10:1 to 100:1
Ranges 2-5
2051T
Range 2-4
2051L
See Instrument Toolkit
Mounting position effects
Models
Mounting position effects
2051C
Zero shifts up to ±1.25 inH2O (3.1 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
2051T
Zero shifts up to ±2.5 inH2O (6.2 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
2051L
With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2.49 mbar). With diaphragm in
horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12.43 mbar) plus extension length on extended units. Zero
shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect.
Vibration effect
Less than ±0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1 field or pipeline with
high vibration level (10-60 Hz 0.21mm displacement peak amplitude / 60-2000 Hz 3g).
Power supply effect
Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt.(1)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR
NE-21.(2)
(1) Does not apply to Wireless (Output Code X).
(2) NAMUR NE-21 does not apply to wireless output code X.
122
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Transient protection (Option Code T1)
Meets IEEE C62.41, Category Location B
6 kV crest (0.5 s - 100 kHz)
3 kA crest (8 × 20 microseconds)
6 kV crest (1.2 × 50 microseconds)
A.6
Functional specifications
A.6.1
Range and sensor limits
Table A-5. Range and Sensor Limits
2051CD, 2051CF, 2051CG, 2051L
Range
Range and sensor limits
1
2
3
4
5
Lower (LRL)
Minimum
span
0.5 inH2O
(1.2 mbar)
2.5 inH2O
(6.2 mbar)
10 inH2O
(24.9 mbar)
3 psi
(0.207 bar)
20 psi
(1.38 bar)
Upper (URL) 2051C Differential
2051CF
Flowmeters
25 inH2O
(62.3 mbar)
250 inH2O
(0.62 bar)
1000 inH2O
(2.49 bar)
300 psi
(20.7 bar)
2000 psi
(137.9 bar)
–25 inH2O
(–62.1 mbar)
–250 inH2O
(–0.62 bar)
-1000 inH2O
(-2.49 bar)
-300 psi
(-20,7 bar)
-2000 psi
(-137.9 bar)
2051C Gage(1)
2051L Differential
2051L Gage(1)
N/A
N/A
–250 inH2O
(–0.62 bar)
–1000 inH2O
(–2.49 bar)
–300 psi
(–20.7 bar)
–250 inH2O
(–0.62 bar)
–393 inH2O
(–979 mbar)
–14.2 psig
(–979 mbar)
N/A
N/A
–25 inH2O
(–62.1 mbar)
–250 inH2O
(–0.62 bar)
–393 inH2O
(–979 mbar)
–14.2 psig
(–979 mbar)
–14.2 psig
(–979 mbar)
(1) Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig.
Table A-6. Range and Sensor Limits
Range
2051T
1
2
3
4
5
Minimum
span
0.3 psi
(20.7 mbar)
1.5 psi
(0.103 bar)
8 psi
(0.55 bar)
40 psi
(2.76 bar)
2,000 psi
(137.9 bar)
Range and sensor limits
Upper
(URL)
Lower
(LRL) (Abs)
Lower(1)
(LRL) (Gage)
30 psi
(2.07 bar)
150 psi
(10.3 bar)
800 psi
(55.2 bar)
4000 psi
(275.8 bar)
10,000 psi
(689.5 bar)
0 psia
(0 bar)
0 psia
(0 bar)
0 psia
(0 bar)
0 psia
(0 bar)
0 psia
(0 bar)
–14.7 psig
(–1.01 bar)
–14.7 psig
(–1.01 bar)
–14.7 psig
(–1.01 bar)
–14.7 psig
(–1.01 bar)
–14.7 psig
(–1.01 bar)
(1) Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
123
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.6.2
Service
Liquid, gas, and vapor applications
A.6.3
Protocols
4–20 mA HART (Output Code A)
Power supply
External power supply required. Standard transmitter operates on 10.5 to 42.4 Vdc with no load.
Load limitations
Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as
described by:
Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage – 10.5)
Load (s)
1387
1000
500
Operating
Region
0
10.5
20
30
Voltage (Vdc)
42.4(1)
Communication requires a minimum
loop resistance of 250 ohms.
(1) For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V.
Indication
Optional 2-line LCD/LOI Display
Zero and span adjustment requirements
Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-5 and Table A-6.
Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-5 and Table A-6.
Output
Two-wire 4-20mA, user selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable
superimposed on 4-20 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to HART protocol.
2051
Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 protocol.
124
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
2051 with selectable HART
The 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications
based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) protocol can be selected.
The HART revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the
optional local operator interface (LOI).
Local operator interface
The LOI utilizes a 2 button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal
buttons are always configured for Local Operator Interface. External Buttons can be configured
for either LOI, (option code M4), Analog Zero and Span (option code D4) or Digital Zero Trim
(option code DZ). See 2051 with Selectable HART product manual (00809-0100-4107) for LOI
configuration menu.
A.6.4
FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output code F)
Power supply
The transmitter requires between 9 and 32 V dc (9 and 30 V dc for intrinsic safety, and 9 and
17.5 V dc for FISCO intrinsic safety) to operate and provide complete functionality.
Current draw
17.5 mA for all configurations (including LCD display option)
Indication
Optional 2-line LCD display
FOUNDATION fieldbus function block execution times
Block
Execution time
Resource
N/A
Transducer
N/A
LCD Display Block
N/A
Analog Input 1, 2
20 milliseconds
PID
25 milliseconds
Input Selector
20 milliseconds
Arithmetic
20 milliseconds
Signal Characterizer
20 milliseconds
Integrator
20 milliseconds
Control Selector
20 milliseconds
Output Splitter
20 milliseconds
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
125
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameters
A.6.5
Schedule Entries
7 (max.)
Links
25 (max.)
Virtual Communications Relationships (VCR)
20 (max.)
Backup Link Active Scheduler (LAS)
The transmitter can function as a Link Active Scheduler if the current link master device fails or is
removed from the segment.
A.6.6
Standard function blocks
Resource block
This block contains hardware, electronics, and diagnostic information.
Transducer block
This block contains actual sensor measurement data including the sensor diagnostics and the
ability to trim the pressure sensor or recall factory defaults.
LCD display block
This block configures the local display.
2 analog input blocks
These blocks process the measurements for input into other function blocks. The output value is
in engineering units or custom and contains a status indicating measurement quality.
PID block
This block contains all logic to perform PID control in the field including cascade and
feedforward.
Input selector block
This block selects between inputs and generates an output using specific selection strategies
such as minimum, maximum, midpoint, average or first “good.”
Arithmetic block
This block provides pre-defined application-based equations including flow with partial density
compensation, electronic remote seals, hydrostatic tank gauging, ratio control and others.
Signal characterizer block
This block characterizes or approximates any function that defines an input/output relationship
by configuring up to twenty X, Y coordinates. The block interpolates an output value for a given
input value using the curve defined by the configured coordinates.
126
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Integrator block
This block compares the integrated or accumulated value from one or two variables to pre-trip
and trip limits and generates discrete output signals when the limits are reached. This block is
useful for calculating total flow, total mass, or volume over time.
Control selector
The control selector is designed to select one of two or three inputs for control. The selection
can be the highest, middle, or lowest. The inputs are normally connected to the outputs of PID
or other function blocks. The block is configured to use one of the inputs to control its output.
The other two inputs can be configured to override the selected input if the process conditions
so require.
Output splitter
The output splitter is designed to split the output of one PID or other control blocks so it can
control two valves or actuators. Although there are many uses for the block, the example below
is controlling the temperature inside a reactor with exothermic reaction. In order to start the
reaction, the reactants have to be heated. The controller signal is split in a way to have the
heating fluid valve controlling the temperature while the cooling valve remains closed. When
the reaction starts, heat is liberated and the heating valve is closed. The coolant valve takes over.
The block allows different combinations of actions.
Physical block
The physical block defines the physical resources of the device including type of memory,
hardware, electronics and diagnostic information.
Transducer block
This block contains actual sensor measurement data including the sensor diagnostics and the
ability to trim the pressure sensor or recall factory defaults.
Indication
Optional 2-line LCD display.
Local Operator Interface
Optional external configuration buttons.
A.6.7
PROFIBUS PA (Output Code W)
Profile version
3.02
Power supply
External power supply required; transmitters operate on 9.0 to 32.0 Vdc transmitter terminal
voltage.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
127
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Current draw
17.5 mA for all configurations (including LCD display option)
Output update rate
Four times per second
Standard function blocks
Analog Input (AI Block)
The AI function block processes the measurements and makes them available to the host device.
The output value from the AI block is in engineering units and contains a status indicating the
quality of the measurement.
Physical block
The physical block defines the physical resources of the device including type of memory,
hardware, electronics, and diagnostic information.
Transducer block
Contains actual sensor measurement data including the sensor diagnostics and the ability to trim
the pressure sensor or recall factory defaults.
Indication
Optional 2-line LCD display.
Local Operator Interface
Optional external configuration buttons.
A.6.8
Wireless (Output Code X)
Output
IEC 62591 (WirelessHART), 2.4 GHz DSSS
Wireless radio (internal antenna, WP5 option)

Frequency: 2.400 - 2.485 GHz

Channels: 15

Modulation: IEEE 802.15.4 compliant DSSS

Transmission: Maximum of 10 dBm EIRP
Local display
The optional 3-line, 7-digit LCD display can display user-selectable information such as primary
variable in engineering units, scaled variable, percent of range, sensor module temperature, and
electronics temperature. The display updates based on the wireless update rate.
128
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Digital zero trim
Digital Zero trim (option DZ) is an offset adjustment to compensate for mounting position
effects, up to 5% of URL.
Update rate
User selectable 1 sec. to 60 min.
Wireless sensor module for in-line transmitters
The 2051 Wireless transmitter requires the engineered polymer housing to be selected. The
standard sensor module will come with aluminum material. If stainless steel is required, the
option WSM must be selected.
Power module
Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe
Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module with PBT/PC enclosure. Ten-year life at one minute
update rate.(1)
(1) Reference conditions are 70 °F (21 °C), and routing data for three additional network devices.
Note: Continuous exposure to ambient temperature limits of -40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to 85 °C) may reduce specified life by less
than 20 percent.
A.6.9
HART 1-5 Vdc Low Power (Output Code M)
Output
Three wire 1–5 Vdc output, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process
variable superimposed on voltage signal, available to any host conforming to the HART
protocol.
2051
Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 protocol.
2051 with selectable HART
The 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications
based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) protocol can be selected.
The HART revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the
optional local operator interface (LOI).
Local Operator Interface
The LOI utilizes a 2 button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal
buttons are always configured for Local Operator Interface. External Buttons can be configured
for either LOI, (option code M4), Analog Zero and Span (option code D4) or Digital Zero Trim
(option code DZ). See 2051 with Selectable HART product manual (00809-0100-4107) for LOI
configuration menu.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
129
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Power supply
External power supply required. Standard transmitter operates on 9 to 28 Vdc with no load.
Power consumption
3.0 mA, 27–84 mW
Output load
100 k or greater (meter input impedance)
A.6.10
Overpressure limits
Transmitters withstand the following limits without damage:
2051C, 2051CF

Ranges 2–5: 3,626 psig (250 bar)
4,500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9

Range 1: 2,000 psig (137,9 bar)
2051T

Range 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar)

Range 2: 1,500 psi (103,4 bar)

Range 3: 1,600 psi (110,3 bar)

Range 4: 6,000 psi (413,7 bar)

Range 5: 15,000 psi (1034,2 bar)
2051L
Limit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower (<page_ref>Table A-7 on page 130).
Table A-7. 2051L Flange Rating
Standard
Type
CS Rating SST Rating
ANSI/ASME
Class 150
285 psig
275 psig
ANSI/ASME
Class 300
740 psig
720 psig
At 100 °F (38 °C), the rating decreases
with increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5.
DIN
PN 10–40
40 bar
40 bar
DIN
PN 10/16
16 bar
16 bar
At 248 °F (120 °C), the rating decreases
with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401.
130
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.6.11
Static pressure limit
2051CD, 2051CF
A.6.12

Operates within specifications between static line pressures of -14.2 psig (0.034 bar)
and 3,626 psig (250 bar)

For Option Code P9, 4,500 psig (310,3 bar)

Range 1: 0.5 psia to 2,000 psig (34 mbar and 137,9 bar)
Burst pressure limits
2051C, 2051CF Coplanar or traditional process flange

10,000 psig (689.5 bar)
2051T In-Line
A.6.13

Ranges 1–4: 11,000 psi (758.4 bar)

Range 5: 26,000 psi (1792.6 bar)
Temperature limits
Ambient
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
With LCD display(1)(2): –40 to 175 °F (–40 to 80 °C)
Storage(1)
–50 to 230 °F (–46 to 110 °C)
With LCD display: –40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
With Wireless Output: -40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to 85 °C)
(1) 2051 LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates may be slower at temperatures below -22 °F (-30 °C).
(2) Wireless LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates will be slower at temperatures below -4 °F (-20 °C).
Process
At atmospheric pressures and above. See Table A-8.
Table A-8. Process Temperature Limits
2051C, 2051CF
Silicone Fill Sensor
(1)
with Coplanar Flange
–40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
with Traditional Flange
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)(3)
with Level Flange
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)
with 305 Integral Manifold
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)(3)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
131
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-8. Process Temperature Limits
2051T (process fill fluid)
Silicone Fill Sensor(1)
-40 to 250 °F (-40 to 121 °C)(2)
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
-22 to 250 °F (-30 to 121 °C)(2)
2051L low-side temperature limits
Silicone Fill Sensor(1)
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
–40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
-40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) (2)
2051L high-side temperature limits (process fill fluid)
Syltherm® XLT
–102 to 293 °F (–75 to 145°C)
®
D.C. Silicone 704
32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C)
D.C. Silicone 200
–49 to 401 °F (–45 to 205 °C)
Inert
–49 to 320 °F (–45 to 160 °C)
Glycerin and Water
5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C)
Neobee M-20
5 to 401 °F (–15 to 205 °C)
Propylene Glycol and Water
5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C)
(1) Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio.
(2) 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia.
(3) 160 °F (71 °C) limit in vacuum service.
A.6.14
Humidity limits
0–100% relative humidity
A.6.15
Turn-on time
Performance within specifications less than 2.0 seconds after power is applied to the
transmitter.(1)
A.6.16
Volumetric displacement
Less than 0.005 in3 (0.08 cm3)
A.6.17
Damping
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Transducer block: 0.4 to 60.0 seconds.
1-second factory default damping.
AI Block: User configurable
(1)
132
Does not apply to wireless option code X.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.6.18
Failure mode alarm
HART 4-20 mA (Output Code A)
If self-diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the analog signal is driven either
high or low to alert the user. High or low failure mode is user-selectable with a jumper on the
transmitter. The values to which the transmitter drives its output in failure mode depend on
whether it is factory-configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation. The values for
each are as follows:
Standard operation
Output code Linear output
Fail high
Fail low
A
3.9  I  20.8
I  21.75 mA I  3.75 mA
M
0.97  V  5.2
V  5.4 V
V  0.95 V
Fail high
Fail low
I  22.5 mA
I  3.6 mA
NAMUR-compliant operation
Output code Linear output
A
3.8  I  20.5
Output code F and X
If self-diagnostics detect a gross transmitter failure, that information gets passed as a status
along with the process variable.
A.7
Physical specifications
A.7.1
Material selection
Emerson provides a variety of Rosemount product with various product options and
configurations including materials of construction that can be expected to perform well in a
wide range of applications. The Rosemount product information presented is intended as a
guide for the purchaser to make an appropriate selection for the application. It is the purchaser’s
sole responsibility to make a careful analysis of all process parameters (such as all chemical
components, temperature, pressure, flow rate, abrasives, contaminants, etc.), when specifying
product, materials, options and components for the particular application. Emerson Process
Management is not in a position to evaluate or guarantee the compatibility of the process fluid
or other process parameters with the product, options, configuration or materials of
construction selected.
A.7.2
Electrical connections
/2–14 NPT, G1/2, and M20 × 1.5 conduit
1
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
133
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
A.7.3
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Process connections
2051C
/4–18 NPT on 21/8-in. centers

1

/2–14 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in.(50,8 mm), 21/8-in. (54,0 mm), or 21/4-in. (57,2 mm)
centers (process adapters)
1
2051T
/2–14 NPT female

1

G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male (available in SST for Range 1–4 transmitters only)

Autoclave type F-250-C (Pressure relieved 9/16–18 gland thread; 1/4 OD high pressure
tube 60° cone; available in SST for Range 5 transmitters only)
2051L

High pressure side: 2-in.(50,8 mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102 mm), ASME B 16.5
(ANSI) Class 150 or 300 flange;
50, 80, or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flange

Low pressure side: 1/4–18 NPT on flange, 1/2–14 NPT on process adapter
2051CF

For 2051CFA wetted parts, see 00813-0100-4485 in the 485 section

For 2051CFC wetted parts, see 00813-0100-4485 in the 405 section

For 2051CFP wetted parts, see 00813-0100-4485 in the 1195 section
2051C process wetted parts
Drain/vent valves
316 SST or Alloy C-276
Process flanges and adapters
Plated carbon steel, SST CF-8M (cast version of 316 SST, material per ASTM-A743), or CW2M
(cast version of Alloy C)
Wetted O-rings
Glass-filled PTFE or Graphite-filled PTFE
Process isolating diaphragms
316L SST, Alloy C-276, or Tantalum
2051T process wetted parts
Process connections

134
316L SST or Alloy C-276
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Process isolating diaphragms

316L SST or Alloy C-276
2051L process wetted parts
Flanged process connection (Transmitter high side)
Process diaphragms, Including process gasket surface

316L SST, Alloy C-276, or Tantalum
Extension

CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST, material per ASTM-A743), or Cast C-276. Fits
schedule 40 and 80 pipe.
Mounting flange

Zinc-cobalt plated CS or SST
Reference process connection (transmitter low side)
Isolating diaphragms

316L SST or Alloy C-276
Reference flange and adapter

CF-8M (Cast version of 316 SST, material per ASTM-A743)
Non-wetted parts for 2051C/T/L
Electronics housing
Low-copper aluminum or CF-8M (Cast version of 316 SST). Enclosure Type 4X, IP 65, IP 66, IP68
Housing Material Code P: PBT/PC with NEMA 4X and IP66/67/68
Paint for aluminum housing
Polyurethane
Coplanar sensor module housing
CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST)
Bolts
ASTM A449, Type 1 (zinc-cobalt plated carbon steel)
ASTM F593G, Condition CW1 (Austenitic 316 SST)
ASTM A193, Grade B7M (zinc plated alloy steel)
Alloy K-500
Sensor module fill fluid
Silicone or inert halocarbon
In-Line series uses Fluorinert® FC-43
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
135
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Process fill fluid (2051L only)
Syltherm XLT, D.C. Silicone 704,
D.C. Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water, Neobee M-20, or propylene glycol and water
Cover O-rings
Buna-N
Silicone (for wireless option code X)
Power module
Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe
Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module with PBT enclosure.
A.7.4
Shipping weights
Table A-9. Transmitter Weights without Options(1)
Transmitte Standard 2051 In lb.
r
(kg)
Wireless In lb.
(kg)
2051C
4.9 (2.2)
3.9 (1,8)
2051L
Table A-10 below
Table A-10 below
2051T
3.1 (1.4)
1.9 (0,86)
(1) Transmitter weights include the sensor module and housing only
(aluminum for standard 2051 and polymer for wireless).
Table A-10. 2051L Weights without Options
136
Flange
Flush
lb. (kg)
2-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
4-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
6-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
2-in., 150
12.5 (5,7)
N/A
N/A
N/A
3-in., 150
17.5 (7,9)
19.5 (8,8)
20.5 (9,3)
21.5 (9,7)
4-in., 150
23.5 (10,7)
26.5 (12,0) 28.5 (12,9) 30.5 (13,8)
2-in., 300
17.5 (7,9)
N/A
3-in., 300
22.5 (10,2)
24.5 (11,1) 25.5 (11,6) 26.5 (12,0)
4-in., 300
32.5 (14,7)
35.5 (16,1) 37.5 (17,0) 39.5 (17,9)
DN 50/PN 40
13.8 (6,2)
N/A
N/A
DN 80/PN 40
19.5 (8,8)
21.5 (9,7)
22.5 (10,2) 23.5 (10,6)
DN 100/PN 10/16 17.8 (8,1)
19.8 (9,0)
20.8 (9,5)
DN 100/PN 40
25.2 (11,5) 26.2 (11,9) 27.2 (12,3)
23.2 (10,5)
N/A
N/A
N/A
21.8 (9,9)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-11. Transmitter Options Weights
Code
Option
Add
lb (kg)
J, K, L, M
Stainless Steel Housing
3.9 (1,8)
M5
LCD Display for Aluminum Housing
0.5 (0,2)
M5
LCD Display for Wireless Output
0.1 (0,04)
B4
SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange 1.0 (0,5)
B1 B2 B3 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
B7 B8 B9 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
BA, BC
SST Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
H2
Traditional Flange
2.6 (1,2)
H3
Traditional Flange
3.0 (1,4)
H4
Traditional Flange
3.0 (1,4)
H7
Traditional Flange
2.7 (1,2)
FC
Level Flange—3 in., 150
12.7 (5,8)
FD
Level Flange—3 in., 300
15.9 (7,2)
FA
Level Flange—2 in., 150
8.0 (3,6)
FB
Level Flange—2 in., 300
8.4 (3,3)
FP
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40
7.8 (3,5)
FQ
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40
12.7 (5,8)
WSM
SST Sensor Module
1.0 (0,45)
Power Module (701PGNKF)
0.4 (0,18)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
137
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.8
Dimensional drawings
Figure A-2. 2051C Exploded View
D
B
E
F
C
G
A
H
I
P
J
O
K
N
L
M
A. Cover
B. Cover O-ring
C. Terminal Block
D. Electronics Housing
E. Local Configuration Buttons(1)
F. Name Plate
G. Electronics Board
H. Housing Rotation Set Screw (180 degree
maximum rotation without further disassembly)
I. Sensor Module
J. Process O-Ring
K. Flange Adapter O-Ring
L. Flange Alignment Screw (not pressure retaining)
M. Flange Bolts
N. Flange Adapters
O. Drain/Vent Valve
P. Coplanar Flange
(1) Span and Zero Adjustment Buttons are optional with 4-20 mA and 1-5 Vdc HART protocol. Local Operator Interface buttons are optional for PROFIBUS PA
protocol. Local Configuration Buttons are not available with Foundation fieldbus.
138
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-3. 2051C Coplanar Flange
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
3.85 (98)
C
7.04 (179)
D
B
A
6.53 (166)
A. Transmitter Circuitry
B. HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2 Display Cover
C. FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA Display Cover
D. Terminal Connections
Figure A-4. 2051 Wireless Housing with Coplanar Platform
4.20
(107)
5.49
(139)
7.41
(188)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
139
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure A-5. 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 305 3-Valve Coplanar Integral Manifold
3.85 (98)
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
C
6.19
(157)
7.44
(189)
E
B
D
A
5.00 (127)
Max Open
A. Drain/Vent Valve
B. Terminal Connections
C. FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA Display Cover
140
9.20 (234)
Max Open
D. HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2 Display Cover
E. Transmitter Circuitry
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-6. Coplanar Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Bracket (B4) for 2-in. Pipe or Panel
Mounting
2.82
(72)
4.36
(111)
2.18
(55)
B
PANEL MOUNTING
2.8 (71)
7.03
(178)
A
6.15
(156)
2.81
(71)
3.4 (85)
4.73
(120)
PIPE MOUNTING
C
6.25
(159)
3.51
(89)
A. 3/8–16 × 11/4 Bolts for Mounting to Transmitter
B. 5/16 3 11/2 Bolts for Panel Mounting (Not Supplied)
C. 2-in. U-Bolt for Pipe Mounting
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
141
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure A-7. 2051C Coplanar with Traditional Flange
3.85 (98)
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
D
7.76
(197)
C
A
E
B
F
1.626
(41,3)
1.10 (28)
3.40 (86)
1.16 (29)
2.13
(54)
Figure A-8. 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 305 3-Valve Traditional Integral Manifold
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
3.85 (98)
D
6.19
(157)
E
A
C
F
B
1.626
(71)
3.75 (95)
Max Open
1.05
(27)
A. 1/2 -14 NPT Flange Adapter (optional)
B. Drain/Vent Valve
C. Terminal Connections
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
142
3.50
(89)
1.10
(28)
2.126
(54)
6.20 (158)
Max Open
2.70 (69)
Max Open
8.90 (226)
Max Open
D. FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA Display Cover
E. HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2Display Cover
F. Transmitter Circuitry
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-9. Traditional Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Brackets for 2-in. Pipe or Panel
Mounting
Panel Mount (Bracket Option B2/B8)
Pipe Mount (Bracket Option B3/B9/BC)
9.18 (233)
2.62
(67)
6.19
(157)
1.94
(49)
11.51
(292)
3.56 (90)
Max Open
5.32
(135)
4.85
(123)
3.50
(89)
1.10
(28)
6.19 (157)
Pipe Mount (Bracket Option B1/ B7/BA)
6.76 (172)
3.56 (90)
Max Open
1.10 (28)
3.50 (89)
2.62 (67)
0.93
(24)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
143
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure A-10. 2051T Dimensional Drawings
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
3.85 (98)
C
7.19 (182.7)
B
D
A
2051 Wireless Housing with In-Line Platform
4.20
(106.6)
5.49
(139.3)
7.56
(192.1)
E
F
A. Transmitter Circuitry
B. HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2Display Cover
C. FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA Display Cover
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
144
D. Terminal Connections
E. U-Bolt Bracket
F. 1/2 -14 NPT Female or G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Process Connection
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-10. 2051T Dimensional Drawings
2051T with Rosemount 306 2-Valve Integral Manifold
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
3.85 (98)
C
7.19
(182.7)
B
D
A
4.85
(123)
4.40
(112)
6.25 (159)
Max Open
A. Transmitter Circuitry
B. HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2Display Cover
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
C. FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA Display Cover
D. Terminal Connections
145
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure A-11. 2051T Typical Mounting Configurations with Optional Mounting Bracket
Pipe mounting
Panel mounting
3.85
(98)
5.16 (131)
1.99 (51)
2.81 (71)
6.21
(158)
3.49
(89)
4.72
(120)
6.90
(175)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
146
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-12. Rosemount 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flowmeter(1)
Front view
Side view
Top view
D
B
C
A
(1) The Pak-Lok Annubar model is available up to 600# ANSI (1,440 psig at 100 °F (99 bar at 38 °C)).
Table A-12. 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flowmeter Dimensional Data
Sensor size
A (Max)
B (Max)
C (Max)
D (Max)
1
8.50 (215.9)
14.55 (369.6)
9.00 (228.6)
6.00 (152.4)
2
11.00 (279.4)
16.30 (414.0)
9.00 (228.6)
6.00 (152.4)
3
12.00 (304.8)
19.05 (483.9)
9.00 (228.6)
6.00 (152.4)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
147
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Orifice plate top view
(Primary Element Type code P)
Compact Orifice Plate
Figure A-13. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flowmeter
Orifice plate side view
Orifice plate front view
Conditioning Orifice Plate
(Primary Element Type code C)
1.125 (28.58)
1.125 (28.58)
Table A-13. 2051CFC Dimensional Drawings
Primary
element type
Type P and C
A
B
Transmitter
height
C
D
5.62 (143)
Transmitter Height + A
6.27 (159)
7.75 (197) - closed
8.25 (210) - open
6.00 (152) - closed
6.25 (159) - open
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
148
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Figure A-14. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Side view
Bottom view
Front view
10.2
[258.28]
8.8 [223.46]
6.2
[156.51]
5.3
[134.51]
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Table A-14. 2051CFP Dimensional Drawings
Line size
Dimension
J (Beveled/Threaded pipe ends)
J (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on)
J (RF 150#, weld neck)
J (RF 300#, weld neck)
J (RF 600#, weld neck)
K (Beveled/Threaded pipe ends)
K (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on)(1)
K (RF 150#, weld neck)
K (RF 300#, weld neck)
K (RF 600#, weld neck)
B.D. (Bore Diameter)
/2-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
12.54 (318.4)
12.62 (320.4)
14.37 (364.9)
14.56 (369.8)
14.81 (376.0)
5.74 (145.7)
5.82 (147.8)
7.57 (192.3)
7.76 (197.1)
8.01 (203.4)
0.664 (16.87)
20.24 (514.0)
20.32 (516.0)
22.37 (568.1)
22.63 (574.7)
22.88 (581.0)
8.75 (222.2)
8.83 (224.2)
10.88 (276.3)
11.14 (282.9)
11.39 (289.2)
1.097 (27.86)
28.44 (722.4)
28.52 (724.4)
30.82 (782.9)
31.06 (789.0)
31.38 (797.1)
11.91 (302.6)
11.99 (304.6)
14.29 (363.1)
14.53 (369.2)
14.85 (377.2)
1.567 (39.80)
1
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
(1) Downstream length shown here includes plate thickness of 0.162-in. (4.11 mm).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
149
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Figure A-15. 2051L Liquid Level
2-in. flange configuration
(flush mount only)
3- and 4-in. flange configuration
3.85
(98)
3.85
(98)
E
A
H
D
A
2-in., 4-in., or 6-in.
Extension
(50.8, 101.6, 152.4)
Optional flushing connection ring
(lower housing)
5.66 (144)
5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)
G
Terminal
Connections
F
E
H
Fieldbus
Display
Cover
HART
Display
Cover
6.60
(68)
7.02
(178)
8.12
(206)
Flushing Connection
Diaphragm assembly and
mounting flange
Transmitter
Circuitry
B
C
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
150
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-15. 2051L Dimensional Specifications
Outside
Extension
Flange
Bolt circle
No. of Bolt hole
diameter
diameter(1)
thickness A diameter B
bolts diameter
C
D
Pipe
size
Class(1)
ASME B16.5 (ANSI)
150
ASME B16.5 (ANSI)
300
DIN 2501 PN 10–40
DIN 2501 PN 25/40
O.D.
gasket
surface E
2 (51)
0.69 (18)
4.75 (121)
6.0 (152)
4
0.75 (19)
N/A
3.6 (92)
3 (76)
0.88 (22)
6.0 (152)
7.5 (191)
4
0.75 (19)
2.58 (66)
5.0 (127)
4 (102)
0.88 (22)
7.5 (191)
9.0 (229)
8
0.75 (19)
3.5 (89)
6.2 (158)
2 (51)
0.82 (21)
5.0 (127)
6.5 (165)
8
0.75 (19)
N/A
3.6 (92)
3 (76)
1.06 (27)
6.62 (168)
8.25 (210)
8
0.88 (22)
2.58 (66)
5.0 (127)
4 (102)
1.19 (30)
7.88 (200)
10.0 (254)
8
0.88 (22)
3.5 (89)
6.2 (158)
DN 50
20 mm
125 mm
165 mm
4
18 mm
N/A
4.0 (102)
DN 80
24 mm
160 mm
200 mm
8
18 mm
66 mm
5.4 (138)
DN 100
24 mm
190 mm
235 mm
8
22 mm
89 mm
6.2 (158)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Class(1)
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300
DIN 2501 PN 10–40
DIN 2501 PN 25/40
Lower housing G
Pipe
size
Process
side F
2 (51)
2.12 (54)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
3 (76)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
4 (102)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
2 (51)
2.12 (54)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
3 (76)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
4 (102)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
DN 50
2.4 (61)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
DN 80
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
DN 100
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
5.65 (143)
1
/4 NPT
1
/2 NPT
H
(1) Tolerances are -0.020 and +0.040 (-0,51 and +1,02).
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
151
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.9
Ordering information
A.9.1
Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter
Transmitter output code
Configuration
4-20 mA HART
2051
A
2051 with Selectable HART
(1)
Lower Power
2051
M
2051 with Selectable HART
2051C Coplanar
Pressure Transmitter
(1)
FOUNDATION fieldbus
F
PROFIBUS
W
Wireless
X
(1) The 4-20mA with Selectable HART device can be ordered with Transmitter
Output option code A plus any of the following options codes: M4, QT, DZ,
CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the purchaser of the equipment. See
page 133 for more information on Material Selection.
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter type
2051C
Coplanar Pressure Transmitter
Measurement type
D
Differential
H
G
Gage
H
Pressure range
2051CD
2051CG
1
-25 to 25 inH2O (-62.2 to 62.2 mbar)
-25 to 25 inH2O (-62.2 to 62.2 mbar)
H
2
-250 to 250 inH2O (-623 to 623 mbar)
-250 to 250 inH2O (-623 to 623 mbar)
H
3
-1000 to 1000 inH2O (-2.5 to 2.5 bar)
-393 to 1000 inH2O (-0.98 to 2.5 bar)
H
4
-300 to 300 psi (-20.7 to 20.7 bar)
-14.2 to 300 psi (-0.98 to 20.7 bar)
H
5
-2000 to 2000 psi (-137.9 to 137.9 bar)
-14.2 to 2000 psi (-0.98 to 137.9 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(1)
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
152
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
H
X
Wireless
M
Low-Power, 1–5 Vdc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Materials of construction
Process flange type
Flange material
Drain/vent
Coplanar
SST
SST
H
3
Coplanar
Cast C-276
Alloy C-276
H
5
2
(2)
Coplanar
Plated CS
SST
H
(2)
7
Coplanar
SST
Alloy C-276
H
8(2)
Coplanar
Plated CS
Alloy C-276
H
0
Alternate Process Connection
H
Isolating diaphragm
2(2)
316L SST
H
3
Alloy C-276
H
5(3)(4)
Tantalum
(2)
O-ring
A
Glass-filled PTFE
H
B
Graphite-filled PTFE
H
Sensor fill fluid
1
Silicone
H
2(4)
Inert
H
Housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
½–14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 × 1.5
H
J
SST
½–14 NPT
H
K(5)
SST
M20 × 1.5
H
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
Aluminum
G½
SST
G½
(6)
P
D
(5)
M
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
H
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
H
153
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Options (Include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
H
WR5
5-year limited warranty
H
HART revision configuration
HR5(7)(19)
Configured for HART Revision 5
H
(8)(19)
Configured for HART Revision 7
H
HR7
PlantWeb control functionality
A01
H
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
Alternate flange
(9)
Traditional Flange, 316 SST, SST Drain/Vent
H
(2)
Traditional Flange, Cast C-276, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent
H
(2)
H7
Traditional Flange, 316 SST, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent
H
HJ
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 7/16 in. Adapter/Manifold Bolting
H
FA
Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount
H
FB
Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount
H
FC
Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount
H
FD
Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount
H
FP
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40, Vertical Mount
H
FQ
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40, Vertical Mount
H
H2
H3
Alternate flange
(10)
HK(11)
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 10 mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting
HL
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 12 mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting
Manifold assembly(11)(12)
S5
Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold
H
S6
Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System
H
Integral mount primary element
(11)(12)
S4(13)
Assemble to Rosemount 405A, 485, or 585 Annubar® primary element or 1195 Integral Orifice primary
element
H
S3
Assemble to Rosemount 405C or 405P Compact Orifice Plate
H
Seal assemblies(12)
S1(14)
S2
(15)
154
Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 diaphragm seal
H
Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 diaphragm seals
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Mounting brackets
B1
Traditional Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts
H
B2
Traditional Flange Bracket for Panel Mounting, CS Bolts
H
B3
Traditional Flange Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts
H
B4
Coplanar Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, all SST
H
B7
B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
H
B8
B2 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
H
B9
B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
H
BA
SST B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
H
BC
SST B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
H
Product certifications
E1(5)
ATEX Flameproof
H
E2
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3(5)
China Flameproof
H
E4
TIIS Flameproof
H
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7
IECEx Flameproof
H
EW
India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval
H
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
I2(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
China (NEPSI) Intrinsic Safety
H
(5)(6)
I4
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
I3
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
(16)
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety
H
(16)
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(16)
IF
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IG(16)
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
K1
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K2
INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
K6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
K7
IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust
H
KA(5)
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KB
I7
IA
IE
IW
(5)
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(5)
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(5)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe
H
KC
KD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
155
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
N1(5)
ATEX Type n
H
(5)
IECEx Type n
H
ND(5)
ATEX Dust
H
EM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof
H
IM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Intrinsic Safety
H
KM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety
H
N7
Drinking water approval
DW(17)
NSF Drinking Water Approval
H
Shipboard approvals
SBS(4)
SBV
(4)
SDN
(4)
(4)
SLL
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval
H
Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval
H
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval
H
Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval
H
Bolting materials
L4
Austenitic 316 SST Bolts
H
L5
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts
H
L6
Alloy K-500 Bolts
H
L8
ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts
H
Display and interface options
M4(18)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
M5
LCD Display
H
Hardware adjustments
D4(19)
Zero and Span Configuration Buttons
H
DZ(20)
Digital Zero Trim
H
Flange adapters
DF(21)
1
/2-14 NPT Flange Adapters
H
Conduit plug
DO(4)(22)
316 SST Conduit Plug
H
RC 1/4 RC 1/2 process connection
D9(23)
RC 1/4 Flange with RC 1/2 Flange Adapter - SST
Ground screw
V5(4)(24)
External Ground Screw Assembly
H
Performance
P8(25)
High Performance Option
H
Transient protection
T1(4)(26)
156
Transient Protection Terminal Block
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Software configuration
C1 (20)
Custom Software Configuration (completed CDS 00806-0100-4101 or 00806-0100-4100 for Wireless
required with order)
H
Alarm limit
C4(19)(27)
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm
H
(19)(27)
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm
H
(19)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
(19)
CS
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CT(19)
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
CN
CR
Pressure testing
P1
Hydrostatic testing with certificate
Cleaning process area
P2
Cleaning for Special Service
P3
Cleaning for < 1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
Maximum static line pressure
P9
4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (2051CD Ranges 2-5 only)
H
Calibration certification
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy C 276
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy 400
Q4
Calibration Certificate
H
QG
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
H
QP
Calibration certification and tamper evident seal
H
Material traceability certification
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(28)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
QT(28)
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Surface finish
Q16
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
H
157
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-16. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Toolkit total system performance reports
QZ
H
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Conduit electrical connection
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy C 276
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy 400
GE(4)
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)
(4)
GM
H
®
H
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast )
NACE certificate
Q15(29)
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for wetted materials
H
Q25(29)
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0103 for wetted materials
H
Typical model number: 2051C D 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4 M5$13857 780
(1) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(2) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits
apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Order with
Q15 or Q25 to receive a NACE certificate.
(3) Available in Ranges 2-5 only.
(4) Not available with output code X.
(5) Not available with Low Power output code M.
(6) Only available with output code X.
(7) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(8) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
(9) Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(10) Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(11) Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.
(12) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(13) Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).
(14) Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adapters.
(15) Not valid with optional codes DF or D9 for Adapters.
(16) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F.
(17) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges,
assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification
(Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(18) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F or Wireless Output Code X.
(19) Only Available with HART 4-20 mA (output codes A and M).
(20) Only available with HART 4-20 mA Output (Output Codes A) and Wireless Output (Output Code X).
(21) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, S6.
(22) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(23) Not available with Alternate Process Connection: DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.
(24) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(25) Available with 4-20 mA HART output code A, Wireless output code X, FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F, 2051C Ranges 2-5 or 2051T Ranges 1-4, SST
diaphragms and silicone fill fluid. High Performance Option includes 0.05% Reference Accuracy, 5 year stability and improved ambient temperature effect
specifications. See Performance specifications for details.
(26) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(27) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(28) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(29) NACE Compliant wetted materials are identified by Footnote 2.
158
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.9.2
Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter
Configuration
2051T In-Line
Wireless Pressure Transmitter
Transmitter output code
4-20 mA HART
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
A
Lower Power
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
M
FOUNDATION fieldbus
F
PROFIBUS
W
Wireless
X
(1) The 4-20mA with Selectable HART device can be ordered with Transmitter
Output option code A plus any of the following options codes: M4, QT, DZ,
CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the purchaser of the equipment. See
page 133 for more information on Material Selection.Ordering Information
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter type
2051T
In-Line Pressure Transmitter
H
Pressure type
G
(1)
A
Gage
H
Absolute
H
Pressure range
2051TG
2051TA
H
1
-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar)
0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.1 bar)
H
2
-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar)
0 to 150 psi (0 to 10.3 bar)
H
3
-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar)
0 to 800 psi (0 to 55 bar)
H
4
-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar)
0 to 4000 psi (0 to 276 bar)
H
5
-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar)
0 to 10000 psi (0 to 689 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(2)
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
159
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
H
X
Wireless
M
Low-Power, 1–5 Vdc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Process connection style
2B
1
H
2C(3)
G1/2 A DIN 16288 male
H
2F
(4)
/2–14 NPT female
Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only)
Isolating diaphragm
Process connection wetted parts material
2(5)
316L SST
316L SST
H
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
H
(5)
3
Sensor fill fluid
1
(4)
2
Silicone
H
Inert
H
Housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
½–14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 × 1.5
H
SST
½–14 NPT
H
K
SST
M20 × 1.5
H
P(7)
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
D
Aluminum
G½
M(6)
SST
G½
J
(6)
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
H
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
H
Options (Include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
H
WR5
5-year limited warranty
H
HART revision configuration
HR5(8)(19) Configured for HART Revision 5
H
HR7(9)(19) Configured for HART Revision 7
H
160
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
PlantWeb control functionality
A01
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
H
Manifold assemblies
S5(10)
Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold
H
Seal assemblies
S1(10)
Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 diaphragm seal
H
Mounting bracket
B4
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST
H
Product certifications
E1(6)
ATEX Flameproof
H
E2
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3(6)
China Flameproof
H
E4
TIIS Flameproof
H
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7(6)
IECEx Flameproof
H
EW(6)
(6)
(6)
India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval
H
(6)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
(6)
I2
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
I3(6)
China Intrinsic Safety
H
I4
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
I1
(6)(7)
I7(6)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
(13)
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety
H
(11)
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(11)
IF
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IG(11)
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IW(6)
India (CCOE) Intrinsic Safety Approval
H
K1
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
K6
IA
IE
(6)
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(6)
IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
(6)
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
K7
KA
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
161
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
KB
KC(6)
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(6)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe
H
N1
(6)
ATEX Type n
H
N7
(6)
IECEx Type n
H
ND(6)
ATEX Dust
H
EM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof
H
IM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Intrinsic Safety
H
KM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety
H
KD
Drinking water approval
DW(12)
NSF Drinking Water Approval
H
Shipboard approvals
SBS(4)
SBV
(4)
SDN
(4)
SLL(4)
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval
H
Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval
H
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval
H
Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval
H
Display and interface options
M4(13)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
M5
LCD Display
H
Hardware adjustments
D4(14)
Zero and Span Configuration Buttons
H
DZ(15)
Digital Zero Trim
H
Wireless SST sensor module
WSM(7)
Wireless SST Sensor Module
H
Conduit plug
DO(4)(16)
316 SST Conduit Plug
H
Ground screw
V5(4)(17)
External Ground Screw Assembly
H
Performance
P8(18)
High Performance Option
H
Terminal blocks
T1(4)(19)
162
Transient Protection Terminal Block
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Software configuration
C1(15)
Custom Software Configuration (completed CDS 00806-0100-4101 or 00806-0100-4100 for Wireless
required with order)
H
Alarm limits
C4(14)(20)
Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High
H
CN(14)(21)
Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm Low
H
(14)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
(14)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
(14)
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
CR
CS
CT
Pressure testing
P1
Hydrostatic testing with certificate
Cleaning process area(22)
P2
Cleaning for Special Service
P3
Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
Calibration certification
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Alloy C 276
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Alloy 400
Q4
Calibration Certificate
H
QG
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
H
QP
Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal
H
Material traceability certification
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(21)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
QT(21)
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Surface finish
Q16
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
H
Toolkit total system performance reports
QZ
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
H
Conduit electrical connector
GE(4)
(4)
GM
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast)
H
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast)
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
163
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-17. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
NACE certificate
Q15(23)
Q25
(23)
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for wetted materials
H
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0103 for wetted materials
H
Typical model number:
2051T G 3 A 2B
2
1 A B4 M5
(1) Wireless Output (code X) only available in absolute measurement type (code A) in range 1-5 with 1/2 14 NPT process connection (code 2B), and housing
code (code P).
(2) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(3) Wireless output (code X) only available in G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male process connection (code 2C) with range 1-4, 316 SST isolating diaphragm (code 2),
silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(4) Not available with output code X.
(5) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits
apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Order with
Q15 or Q25 to receive a NACE certificate.
(6) Not available with Low Power output code M.
(7) Only available with output code X.
(8) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(9) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
(10) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(11) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F.
(12) Not available with coned and threaded connection (2F code), assemble-to manifold (S5 code), assemble-to seal (S1 code), surface finish certification (Q16
code), remote seal system report (QZ code).
(13) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F or Wireless output code X.
(14) Only Available with HART (output codes A and M).
(15) Only available with HART 4-20 mA Output (output code A) and Wireless Output (output code X).
(16) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(17) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(18) Available with 4-20 mA HART output code A, Wireless output code X, FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F, 2051C Ranges 2-5 or 2051T Ranges 1-4, SST
diaphragms and silicone fill fluid. High Performance Option includes 0.05% Reference Accuracy, 5 year stability and improved ambient temperature effect
specifications. See Performance Specifications for details.
(19) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(20) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(21) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(22) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.
(23) NACE Compliant wetted materials are identified by Footnote 2.
164
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.9.3
Rosemount 2051CF Flowmeters
Transmitter output code
Configuration
4-20 mA HART®
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
A
Lower Power
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
M
FOUNDATION fieldbus
F
PROFIBUS
W
Wireless
X
(1) The 4-20 mA with Selectable HART device can be ordered with
Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following options
codes: M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the purchaser of the equipment. See
page 133 for more information on Material Selection.
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product description
2051CFA
Annubar Flowmeter
Measurement type
Differential Pressure
H
L
Liquid
H
G
Gas
H
S
Steam
H
020
2-in. (50 mm)
H
025
21/2-in. (63.5 mm)
H
030
3-in. (80 mm)
H
D
Fluid type
Line size
035
3 /2-in. (89 mm)
H
040
4-in. (100 mm)
H
050
5-in. (125 mm)
H
060
6-in. (150 mm)
H
070
7-in. (175 mm)
H
080
8-in. (200 mm)
H
100
10-in. (250 mm)
H
120
12-in. (300 mm)
H
1
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
165
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Pipe I.D. range
C
Range C from the Pipe I.D. table
H
D
Range D from the Pipe I.D. table
H
A
Range A from the Pipe I.D. table
B
Range B from the Pipe I.D. table
E
Range E from the Pipe I.D. table
Z
Non-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 in.
Pipe material/mounting assembly material
C
Carbon steel (A105)
H
S
316 Stainless Steel
H
(1)
0
No Mounting (customer supplied)
G
Chrome-Moly Grade F-11
N
Chrome-Moly Grade F-22
J
Chrome-Moly Grade F-91
Piping orientation
H
Horizontal Piping
H
D
Vertical Piping with Downwards Flow
H
U
Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow
H
Annubar type
P
Pak-Lok
H
F
Flanged with opposite side support
H
Sensor material
316 Stainless Steel
H
1
Sensor size 1 — Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm)
H
2
Sensor size 2 — Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm)
H
3
Sensor size 3 — Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm)
H
S
Sensor size
Mounting type
T1
Compression or Threaded Connection
H
A1
150# RF ANSI
H
A3
300# RF ANSI
H
A6
600# RF ANSI
H
D1
DN PN16 Flange
H
D3
DN PN40 Flange
H
D6
DN PN100 Flange
H
R1
150# RTJ Flange
R3
300# RTJ Flange
R6
600# RTJ Flange
Opposite side support or packing gland
0
No opposite side support or packing gland (required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models)
H
Opposite Side Support – Required for Flanged Models
166
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
C
NPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
H
D
Welded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
H
Isolation valve for Flo-Tap models
0(1)
H
Not Applicable or Customer Supplied
Temperature measurement
T
Integral RTD – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600#
H
0
No Temperature Sensor
H
R
Remote Thermowell and RTD
Transmitter connection platform
3
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold– not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
H
5
Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
H
7
Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. FNPT)
H
8
1
Remote-mount SW Connections ( /2-in.)
Differential pressure range
1
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
H
2
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
H
3
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(2)
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
X
Wireless
H
M
Low-Power, 1-5 Vdc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
1
/2-14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 x 1.5
H
J
SST
1
/2-14 NPT
H
K(3)
SST
M20 x 1.5
H
P
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
D
Aluminum
G1/2
M(3)
SST
G1/2
(4)
Transmitter performance class
1
2.0% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability
H
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
H
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
H
167
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Options (Include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
WR5
5-year limited warranty
Pressure testing
P1(3)(5)
(3)(5)
PX
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Extended Hydrostatic Testing
Special cleaning
P2(3)
Cleaning for Special Services
PA(3)
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material testing
V1(3)
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material examination
V2(3)
Radiographic Examination
Special inspection
QC1(3)
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
H
QC7(3)
Inspection & Performance Certificate
H
Surface finish
RL(3)
RH
(3)
Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam
H
Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid
H
Material traceability certification
Q8(3)(6)
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1
H
Code conformance
J2 (3)
ANSI/ASME B31.1
(3)
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J3
Materials conformance
J5(3)(7)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country certification
J6(3)
European Pressure Directive (PED)
J1(3)
Canadian Registration
H
Instrument connections for remote mount options
G2(3)
Needle Valves, Stainless Steel
H
G6
OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel
H
G1(3)
Needle Valves, Carbon Steel
G3(3)
Needle Valves, Alloy C-276
G5(3)
OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon Steel
(3)
(3)
G7
168
OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Special shipment
Y1(3)
Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately
H
Product certifications
E1(3)
ATEX Flameproof
H
E2(3)
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3
China Flameproof
H
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7(3)
IECEx Flameproof
H
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
I2(3)
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
I7(3)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
IA(3)(8)
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
H
IE
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IF(3)(8)
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IG
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
K1(3)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
H
K6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
H
K7
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)
H
KA(3)
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5,
and I6)
H
KC(3)
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KD(3)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)
H
(3)
N1
ATEX Type n
H
N7(3)
IECEx Type n
H
ND(3)
ATEX Dust
H
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)(8)
(3)(8)
(3)
Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options
L1(3)(9)
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid
H
L2(3)
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
(3)(9)
LA
Display and interface options
M4(3)(10)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
M5(3)
LCD Display
H
Transmitter calibration certification
Q4(3)
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(3)(11)
(3)(11)
QT
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
169
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-18. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Transient protection
T1(3)(9)(12)
H
Transient terminal block
Manifold for remote mount option
F2(3)
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
H
(3)
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
H
F6
F1(3)
3-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
F5(3)
5-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
PlantWeb control functionality
A01(3)(8)
H
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
Hardware adjustments
D4(3)(13)
Zero and Span Hardware Adjustments
H
DZ(3)(14)
Digital Zero Trim
H
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
H
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
H
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CS
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CT(3)(13)
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
Alarm limit
C4(3)(13)(15)
CN
(3)(13)(15)
CR(3)(13)
(3)(13)
Ground screw
V5(3)(9)(16)
H
External Ground Screw Assembly
HART revision configuration
HR5(3)(13)(17)
Configured for HART Revision 5
H
HR7(3)(13)(18)
Configured for HART Revision 7
H
Typical model
number: 2051CFA
D
L
060
D
C
H
P
S
2
T1
0
0
0
3
2A
A
1A
3
(1) Provide the “A” dimension for Flanged (page 147) and Pak-Lok (page 147).
(2) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(3) Not available with Low Power Output Code M.
(4) Only available with output code X.
(5) Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.
(6) Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification.
(7) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental
limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(8) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(9) Not available with output code X.
(10) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Wireless (Output Code X).
(11) Only available with 4-20 mA HART (Output Code A).
(12) Not available with Housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO
Product Certification code IA.
(13) Only available with 4-20 mA HART (output codes A and M).
(14) Only available with HART 4-20 mA Output (output codes A and M) and Wireless Output (output code X).
(15) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(16) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(17) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(18) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
170
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the purchaser of the equipment. See
page 133 for more information on Material Selection.
Table A-19. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product description
2051CFC
Compact Flowmeter
Measurement type
D
Differential Pressure
H
Primary element technology
A
Annubar Averaging Pitot Tube
C
Conditioning Orifice Plate
H
P
Orifice Plate
H
Material type
316 SST
H
1
H
010
1-in. (25 mm)
H
015(1)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
H
020
2-in. (50 mm)
H
030
3-in. (80 mm)
H
040
4-in. (100 mm)
H
060
6-in. (150 mm)
H
080
8-in. (200 mm)
H
100
10-in. (250 mm)
H
120
12-in. (300 mm)
H
S
Line size
005(1)
(1)
/2-in. (15 mm)
Primary element style
N
Square Edged
H
Primary element type
N000
Annubar Sensor Size 1
N040
0.40 Beta Ratio
N050
0.50 Beta Ratio
N065(2)
0.65 Beta Ratio
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
H
H
171
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-19. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Temperature measurement
0
No Temperature Sensor
R
Remote Thermowell and RTD
H
Transmitter connection platform
3
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold
H
7
Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections
H
Differential pressure range
1
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
H
2
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
H
3
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(3)
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
X
Wireless
H
M
Low-Power, 1-5 Vdc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
1
/2-14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 x 1.5
H
J
SST
1
/2-14 NPT
H
K
SST
M20 x 1.5
H
P(5)
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
(4)
1
D
Aluminum
G /2
M(4)
SST
G1/2
Transmitter performance class
1
H
up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
H
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
H
Options (include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
WR5
5-year limited warranty
Installation accessories
AB(4)
ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (only required for 10-in. [250 mm] and 12-in. [300 mm] line sizes)
H
AC(4)
ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (only required for 10-in. [250 mm] and 12-in. [300 mm] line sizes)
H
ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (only required for 10-in. [250 mm] and 12-in. [300 mm] line sizes)
H
DIN Alignment Ring (PN16)
H
AD
(4)
DG(4)
172
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-19. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
DH(4)
DIN Alignment Ring (PN40)
H
DJ
DIN Alignment Ring (PN100)
H
JB(4)
JIS Alignment Ring (10K)
JR(4)
JIS Alignment Ring (20K)
(4)
JIS Alignment Ring (40K)
(4)
JS
Remote adapters
FE(4)
Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT)
H
High temperature application
HT(4)
Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 °F)
Flow calibration
WC(4)(6)
(4)(6)
WD
Flow Calibration Certification (3 point)
Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point)
Pressure testing
P1(4)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Special cleaning
P2(4)
(4)
PA
Cleaning for Special Services
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Special inspection
QC1(4)
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
H
QC7(4)
Inspection and Performance Certificate
H
Transmitter calibration certification
Q4(4)
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(4)(7)
(4)(7)
QT
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Material traceability certification
Q8(4)
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
H
Code conformance
J2(4)
ANSI/ASME B31.1
(4)
J3
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4(4)
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials conformance
J5(4)(8)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country certification
J1(4)
Canadian Registration
Product certifications
E1(4)
ATEX Flameproof
H
E2(4)
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3(4)
China Flameproof
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
173
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-19. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7(4)
IECEx Flameproof
H
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
I2(4)
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
I7(4)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
IA
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
H
IE(4)(9)
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IF(4)(9)
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(4)
(4)
(4)(9)
(4)(9)
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
K1(4)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
H
K6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
H
K7
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)
H
KA(4)
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and
I6)
H
KC(4)
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KD(4)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)
H
(4)
ATEX Type n
H
N7(4)
IECEx Type n
H
ATEX Dust
H
IG
(4)
N1
ND
(4)
Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options
L1(4)(10)
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid
H
L2(4)
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
LA
(4)(10)
Display and interface options
M4(4)(7)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
M5(4)
LCD Display
H
Transient protection
T1(4)(10)(11)
H
Transient terminal block
Manifold for remote mount option
F2(4)
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
H
F6(4)
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
H
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
H
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
H
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CS
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CT(4)(12)
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
Alarm limit
C4(4)(12)(13)
CN
(4)(12)(13)
CR(4)(12)
(4)(12)
174
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-19. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
PlantWeb control functionality
A01(4)(9)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
H
Hardware adjustments
D4(4)(12)
(4)(14)
DZ
Zero and Span Hardware Adjustments
H
Digital Zero Trim
H
Ground screw
V5(4)(10)(15)
External Ground Screw Assembly
H
HART revision configuration
HR5(4)(12)(16)
Configured for HART Revision 5
H
HR7(4)(12)(17)
Configured for HART Revision 7
H
Typical model number:
2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5
(1) Not available for Primary Element Technology C.
(2) For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C.
(3) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(4) Not available with Low Power Output Code M.
(5) Only available with output code X.
(6) Not available with Primary Element Technology P.
(7) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Wireless (Output Code X).
(8) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits
apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(9) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(10) Not available with output code X.
(11) Not available with Housing code 00, 5A, or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO
Product Certification code IA.
(12) Only available with 4-20 mA HART (output codes A and M).
(13) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(14) Only available with HART 4-20 mA (Output Codes A and M) and Wireless (Output Code X).
(15) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(16) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(17) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if 14 needed.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
175
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the purchaser of the equipment. See
page 133 for more information on Material Selection.
Table A-20. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product description
2051CFP
Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Measurement type
D
Differential Pressure
H
Material type
316 SST
H
005
1
H
010
1-in. (25 mm)
S
Line size
015
/2-in. (15 mm)
1
1 /2-in. (40 mm)
H
H
Process connection
T1
NPT Female Body (not available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
H
S1(1)
Socket Weld Body (not available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
H
P1
Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded
H
P2
Pipe ends: Beveled
H
D1
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on
H
D2
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on
H
D3
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on
H
W1
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck
H
W3
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck
H
W6
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck
H
Process connection
A1
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
A3
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
A6
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
R1
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
R3
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
R6
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
Orifice plate material
S
176
316 SST
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-20. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Bore size option
0066
0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0109
0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0160
0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0196
0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0260
0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0340
0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0150
0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0250
0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0345
0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0500
0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0630
0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0800
0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
H
0295
0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0376
0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0512
0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0748
0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
1022
1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
1184
1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
H
0010
0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0014
0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0020
0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0034
0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
Transmitter connection platform
D3
Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
H
D5
Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
H
R3
Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
H
R5
Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
H
Differential pressure ranges
1
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
H
2
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
H
3
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(2)
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
X
Wireless
H
M
Low-Power, 1-5 Vdc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
1
/2-14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 x 1.5
H
J
SST
1
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
/2-14 NPT
177
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-20. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
K(3)
SST
M20 x 1.5
H
P(4)
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
D
Aluminum
G1/2
M(3)
SST
G1/2
Transmitter performance class
1
H
up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
H
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
H
Options (include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
WR5
5-year limited warranty
Temperature sensor
RT(3)(5)
Thermowell and RTD
Optional connection
G1(3)
DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection
H
Pressure testing
P1(3)(6)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Special cleaning
P2(3)
Cleaning for Special Services
PA(3)
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material testing
V1(3)
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material examination
V2(3)
Radiographic Examination
Flow calibration
WD(3)(7)
Discharge Coefficient Verification
Special inspection
QC1(3)
(3)
QC7
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
H
Inspection and Performance Certificate
H
Material traceability certification
Q8(3)
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
H
Code conformance
J2(3)(8)
178
ANSI/ASME B31.1
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-20. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
J3(3)(8)
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4(3)(8)
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials conformance
J5(3)(9)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country certification
J6(3)
(3)
J1
European Pressure Directive (PED)
H
Canadian Registration
Transmitter calibration certification
Q4(3)
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(3)(10)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
QT(3)(13)
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Product certifications
E1(3)
ATEX Flameproof
H
E2(3)
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3
China Flameproof
H
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7
IECEx Flameproof
H
I1(3)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
I2
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
I3(3)
China Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
IA(3)(11)
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
H
IE(3)(11)
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IF
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IG(3)(11)
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
K1
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
H
K6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
H
K7(3)
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)
H
KA
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and
I6)
H
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KD
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)
H
N1(3)
ATEX Type n
H
(3)
N7
IECEx Type n
H
ND(3)
ATEX Dust
H
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)(11)
(3)(11)
(3)
KC(3)
(3)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
179
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-20. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options
L1(3)(12)
L2
(3)
LA(3)(12)
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid
H
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
H
Display and interface options
M4(3)(13)
M5
(3)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
LCD Display
H
Transient protection
T1(3)(12)(13)
Transient terminal block
H
C4(3)(14)(15)
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
H
CN(3)(14)(15)
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
H
CR
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
CS(3)(14)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
Alarm limit
(3)(14)
(3)(14)
CT
PlantWeb control functionality
A01(3)(11)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
H
Hardware adjustments
D4(3)(14)
DZ
(3)(16)
Zero and Span Hardware Adjustments
H
Digital Zero Trim
H
Ground screw
V5(3)(12)(17)
External Ground Screw Assembly
H
HART revision configuration
HR5(3)(14)(18) Configured for HART Revision 5
H
HR7(3)(14)(19) Configured for HART Revision 7
H
Typical model number:
2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5
(1) To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.
(2) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(3) Not available with Low Power Output Code M.
(4) Only available with output code X.
(5) Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.
(6) Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.
(7) Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.
(8) Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.
(9) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits
apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(10) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Wireless (Output Code X).
(11) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(12) Not available with output code X.
(13) Not available with Housing code 00, 5A, or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO
Product Certification code IA.
(14) Only available with 4-20 mA HART (output codes A and M).
(15) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(16) Only available with HART 4-20 mA (Output Codes A and M) and Wireless (Output Code X).
(17) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(18) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(19) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
180
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.10
Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter
Transmitter output code
Configuration
2051L Liquid Level
Transmitter
4-20 mA HART
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
A
Lower Power
2051
2051 with Selectable HART(1)
M
FOUNDATION fieldbus
F
PROFIBUS
W
Wireless
X
(1) The 4-20mA with Selectable HART device can be ordered with Transmitter
Output option code A plus any of the following options codes: M4, QT, DZ,
CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
Additional Information
Specifications: page 120
Certifications: page 200
Dimensional Drawings: page 138
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter type
2051L
Liquid Level Transmitter
H
Pressure range
2
–250 to 250 inH2O (–0,6 to 0,6 bar)
H
3
–1000 to 1000 inH2O (–2,5 to 2,5 bar)
H
4
–300 to 300 psi (–20,7 to 20,7 bar)
H
Transmitter output
A(1)
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
H
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
H
W
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
H
X
Wireless
H
M
Low-Power, 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Process connection size, diaphragm material (high side)
Process connection size
Diaphragm
(2)
2 in./DN 50
316L SST
H
(2)
H
2 in./DN 50
Alloy C-276
H
J
2 in./DN 50
Tantalum
H
(2)
3 in./DN 80
316L SST
H
(2)
4 in./DN 100
316L SST
H
(2)
3 in./DN 80
Alloy C-276
H
G
A
B
C
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
181
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
D(2)
4 in./DN 100
Alloy C-276
H
E
3 in./DN 80
Tantalum
H
F
4 in./DN 100
Tantalum
H
Extension length (high side)
0
None, Flush Mount
H
2
2 in./50 mm
H
4
4 in./100 mm
H
6
6 in./150 mm
H
Mounting flange size, rating, material (high side)
Size
Rating
Material
M
2-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
CS
H
A
3-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
CS
H
B
4-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
CS
H
N
2-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
CS
H
C
3-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
CS
H
D
4-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
CS
H
(2)
X
2-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
SST
H
F(2)
3-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
SST
H
(2)
4-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
SST
H
(2)
Displayed
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
SST
H
(2)
G
Y
3-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
SST
H
J(2)
4-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
SST
H
Q
DN50
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
CS
H
R
H
DN80
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
CS
H
(2)
K
DN50
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
SST
H
T(2)
DN80
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
SST
H
Seal fill fluid (high side)
Specific gravity
Temperature limits
(ambient temperature of
70 °F (21 °C))
A
Syltherm XLT
0.85
-102 to 293 °F (-75 to 145 °C)
H
C
Silicone 704
1.07
32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C)
H
D
Silicone 200
0.93
-49 to 401 °F (-45 to 205 °C)
H
H
Inert (Halocarbon)
1.85
5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C)
H
G
Glycerin and Water
1.13
-49 to 320 °F (-45 to 160 °C)
H
N
Neobee M-20
0.92
5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C)
H
P
Propylene Glycol and Water
1.02
5 to 203 °F (-15 to 95 °C)
H
182
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Sensor module configuration, flange adapter (low side)
Configuration
Flange adapter
1
Gage
SST
H
2
Differential
SST
H
3(3)
Tuned-System with Remote Seal
None
H
Sensor module diaphragm material, sensor fill fluid (low side)
Diaphragm material
Sensor fill fluid
1
316L SST
Silicone
H
2
Alloy C-276 (SST Valve Seat)
Silicone
H
7
Alloy C-276 (Alloy C-276 Valve Seat)
Silicone
H
A(4)
316L SST
Inert (Halocarbon)
H
(2)(4)
Alloy C-276 (SST Valve Seat)
Inert (Halocarbon)
H
(4)
Alloy C-276 (Alloy C-276 Valve Seat)
Inert (Halocarbon)
H
B
G
O-ring
A
H
Glass-filled PTFE
Housing material
Conduit entry size
A
Aluminum
½–14 NPT
H
B
Aluminum
M20 × 1.5
H
SST
½–14 NPT
H
K
SST
M20 × 1.5
H
P(6)
Engineered Polymer
No Conduit Entries
H
J
(5)
Housing material
Conduit entry size
D
Aluminum
G½
SST
G½
(5)
M
Wireless options (requires Wireless output code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless transmit rate, operating frequency and protocol
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
H
Antenna and SmartPower
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
H
Options (include with selected model number)
Extended product warranty
WR3
3-year limited warranty
H
WR5
5-year limited warranty
H
HART revision configuration
HR5(7)(19)
Configured for HART Revision 5
H
HR7(8)(19)
Configured for HART Revision 7
H
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
183
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
PlantWeb control functionality
A01(9)
H
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
Seal assemblies
S1(10)
H
Assemble to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (requires 1199M)
Product certifications
E1(5)
(5)
ATEX Flameproof
H
INMETRO Flameproof
H
E3(5)
China Flameproof
H
E4
TIIS Flameproof
H
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
H
E6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2
H
E7(5)
IECEx Flameproof
H
E2
(5)
India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval
H
(5)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
H
(5)
I2
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe
H
I3(5)
China Intrinsic Safety
H
I4
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
H
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
I6
CSA Intrinsically Safe
H
I7(5)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
H
(9)
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety
H
(9)
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(9)
IF
CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
IG(9)
IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safety Approval
H
(5)
K1
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust
H
K2
INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety
H
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
K6
EW
I1
(5)(6)
IA
IE
IW
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(5)
IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust
H
(5)
KA
ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(5)
FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
H
(5)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe
H
(5)
ATEX Type n
H
N7(5)
IECEx Type n
H
ATEX Dust
H
K7
KC
KD
N1
ND
184
(5)
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
EM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof
H
IM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Intrinsic Safety
H
KM
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety
H
Shipboard approvals
SBS(4)
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval
H
(4)
Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval
H
(4)
SDN
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval
H
SLL(4)
Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval
H
SBV
Display and interface options
M4(11)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
H
M5
LCD Display
H
Hardware adjustments
D4(12)
Zero and Span Configuration Buttons
H
DZ(13)
Digital Zero Trim
H
Flange adapters
DF(14)
1
/2-14 NPT Flange Adapters
H
Conduit plug
DO(4)(15)
316 SST Conduit Plug
H
Ground screw
V5(4)(16)
External Ground Screw Assembly
H
Transient protection
T1(4)(17)
Transient Terminal Block
H
Software configuration
C1(13)
Custom Software Configuration (requires completed Configuration Data Sheet)
H
Alarm limit
C4(12)(18)
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm
H
CN
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm
H
CR(12)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
(12)
Custom Alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Configuration Data Sheet)
H
(12)
Low Alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)
H
(12)(18)
CS
CT
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
185
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table A-21. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
H The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (H) should be selected for best delivery.
The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Calibration certification
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy C 276--we cannot use this name
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy 400--we cannot use this name
Q4
Calibration Certificate
H
QG
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
H
GP
Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal
H
Material traceability certification
D3
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (no flange adapters), Alloy C 276--we cannot use this name
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1
H
Quality certification for safety
QS(19)
(19)
QT
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
H
Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA
H
Toolkit total system performance reports
QZ
H
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Conduit electrical connector
GE(4)
(4)
GM
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast)
H
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast)
H
NACE certificate
Q15(20)
Q25
(20)
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for wetted materials
H
Certificate of Compliance to NACE MR0103 for wetted materials
H
Lower housing flushing connection options
Ring material
F1
316 SST
F2
316 SST
Number
Size (NPT)
1
1
H
2
1
H
H
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
(21)
Alloy C-276
1
1
F4(21)
Alloy C-276
2
1
H
1
1
H
2
1
H
H
H
F3
F7
F8
316 SST
316 SST
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
F9
Alloy C-276
1
1
F0
Alloy C-276
2
1
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
Typical model number: 2051L 2 A A0 X D 21 A A B4 M5 F1
(1) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART
Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
(2) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining
environments. Order with Q15 or Q25 to receive a NACE certificate.
(3) Requires option code S1.
(4) Not available with output code X.
(5) Not available with Low Power output code M.
(6) Only available with output code X.
(7) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(8) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
(9) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F.
186
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
October 2014
(10) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(11) Not valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus output code F and Wireless Output Code X.
(12) Only available with 4-20 mA HART (output codes A and M).
(13) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output codes A) and Wireless output (output code X).
(14) Not available with Remote Mount Seal Assembly option S1.
(15) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(16) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
(17) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG.
(18) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory.
(19) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(20) NACE Compliant wetted materials are identified by Footnote 2.
(21) Not available with Option Codes A0, B0, and G0.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
187
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.11
Options
A.11.1
Standard configuration
Unless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows:
ENGINEERING UNITS
Differential/Gage
2051TA
inH2O (Ranges 1, 2, and 3)
psi (Ranges 4-5)
psi (all ranges)
4 mA (1 Vdc)(1):
0 (engineering units)
20 mA (5 Vdc)(1):
Upper range limit
Output:
Linear
Flange type:
Specified model code option
Flange material:
Specified model code option
O-ring material:
Specified model code option
Drain/vent:
Specified model code option
LCD display:
Installed or none
Alarm(1):
High
Software tag:
(Blank)
(1) Not applicable to Foundation fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA, or Wireless.
A.11.2
Custom configuration(1)
If Option Code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the
standard configuration parameters.

Output Information

Transmitter Information

LCD display Configuration

Hardware Selectable Information

Signal Selection

Wireless Information

Scaled Variable

and more
Refer to the “Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet” document number 00806-0100-4101.
For wireless, refer to the “Rosemount 2051 Wireless Configuration Data Sheet” document
number 00806-0100-4102.
(1)
188
Not applicable to FOUNDATION fieldbus or PROFIBUS PA protocols.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Tagging (3 options available)

Standard SST hardware tag is permanently affixed on transmitter. Tag character height
is 0.125 in. (3,18 mm), 84 characters maximum.

Tag may be wired to the transmitter nameplate upon request, 85 characters
maximum.
Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol.
A.11.3

HART Revision 5: 8 characters

HART Revision 7 and Wireless: 32 characters

FOUNDATION fieldbus: 32 characters

PROFIBUS PA: 32 characters
Commissioning tag(1)
A temporary commissioning tag is attached to all transmitters. The tag indicates the device ID
and allows an area for writing the location.
(1)Only applicable to FOUNDATION fieldbus.
A.11.4
Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds
Factory assembled to 2051C and 2051T transmitters. Refer to Product Data Sheet (document
number 00813-0100-4839 for Rosemount 304 and 00813-0100-4733 for Rosemount 305 and
306) for additional information.
A.11.5
Other seals
Refer to the Rosemount 1199 Seal Systems Product Data Sheet (document number
00813-0100-4016) for additional information.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
189
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
A.11.6
Output information
Output range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include:
Pressure
[email protected] °C(1)
atm
g/cm2
psi
2
mbar
mmH2O
kg/cm
torr
bar
mmHg
Pa
[email protected] °C(1)
inH20
[email protected] °C(1)
kPa
[email protected] °C(1)
inHg
ftH20
MPa(1)(2)
[email protected] °F(1)
hPa(1)
[email protected] °F(1)
kg/SqM(1)
[email protected] °C(1)
[email protected] °C(1)
Psf(1)
[email protected](1)
[email protected] °C(1)
hPa(1)
bbl
kg
cm3
ft3
lb
m3
gal
L
ton
%
ft
cm
in
mm
Flow(2)(3)
Level
(3)
(1) Available with enhanced 2051 and Wireless.
(2) Available on PROFIBUS PA.
(3) All flow units are available per second, minute, hour or day.
A.11.7
Display and interface options
M4 Digital Display with Local Operator Interface (LOI)

Available for 4-20 mA HART, 4-20 mA HART Low Power, and PROFIBUS PA
M5 Digital Display
A.11.8

2-Line, 5-Digit LCD display for 4-20 mA HART

2-Line, 5-Digit LCD display for 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power

2-Line, 8-Digit LCD display for FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA

3-Line, 7-Digit LCD display for Wireless

Direct reading of digital data for higher accuracy

Displays user-defined flow, level, volume, or pressure units

Displays diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting

90-degree rotation capability for easy viewing
Configuration buttons
Rosemount 2051 requires option D4 (Analog Zero and Span), DZ (Digital Trim), M4 (LOI) for local
configuration buttons.
190
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.11.9
Transient protection
T1
Integral Transient Protection Terminal Block
Meets IEEE C62.41, Category Location B
6 kV crest (0.5 s - 100 kHz)
3 kA crest (8 × 20 microseconds)
6 kV crest (1.2 × 50 microseconds)
A.11.10
Bolts for flanges and adapters

A.11.11
L4
L5
Austenitic 316 Stainless Steel Bolts
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts
L6
L8
Alloy K-500 Bolts
ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts
Conduit plug
DO

A.11.12
316 SST Conduit Plug
Single 316 SST conduit plug replaces carbon steel plug
Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange and 2051T bracket
option
B4
A.11.13
Standard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting

For use with the standard Coplanar flange configuration

Bracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panel

Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bolts
Rosemount 2051C traditional flange bracket options
B1
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting

For use with the traditional flange option

Bracket for mounting on 2-in. pipe

Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts

Coated with polyurethane paint
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
191
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
B2

For use with the traditional flange option

Bracket for mounting transmitter on wall
or panel

Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts

Coated with polyurethane paint
B3
Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting

For use with the traditional flange option

Bracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe

Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts

Coated with polyurethane paint
B7

B8

B9

BA

BC

192
Bracket for Panel Mounting
B1 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
B2 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
B3 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
Stainless Steel B1 Bracket with SST Bolts
B1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
Stainless Steel B3 Bracket with SST Bolts
B3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
A.12
Spare parts
Rosemount 2051 upgrade kits
Part number
The following come with electronics board and configuration buttons (if applicable).
Aluminum/SST
4-20 mA HART with no configuration buttons
02021-0020-2100
4-20 mA HART with Digital Zero Trim
02021-0020-2110
4-20 mA HART with Analog Zero and Span
02021-0020-2120
Rosemount 2051 LOI upgrade kit
Part number
The following come with electronics board, LOI display, and LOI configuration buttons. Order display cover if
needed.
4-20 mA HART with LOI
02021-0020-2139
Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART LCD/LOI Display
Part number
The following come with new LCD or LOI display and housing covers.
4-20 mA HART LOI with Aluminum Cover
03031-0199-0012
4-20 mA HART LOI with SST Cover
03031-0199-0022
4-20 mA HART LCD Display with Aluminum Cover
03031-0199-0011
4-20 mA HART LCD Display with SST Cover
03031-0199-0021
PROFIBUS PA LOI Upgrade Kits
Part number
Including LCD Display and Aluminum Cover
02051-9030-0001
Including LCD Display and SST Cover
02051-9030-0011
Without LCD Display and Covers for use with Aluminum Housings
02051-9030-1001
Without LCD Display and Covers for use with SST Housings
02051-9030-1011
Terminal block
Part number
4-20 mA HART Output
Standard terminal block assembly
02051-9005-0001
Transient terminal block assembly (option T1)
02051-9005-0002
1-5 Vdc HART Low Power Output
Standard terminal block assembly
02051-9005-0011
Transient terminal block assembly (option T1)
02051-9005-0012
FOUNDATION fieldbus Output
Standard terminal block assembly(1)
02051-9005-0024
Transient terminal block assembly (option T1)(1)
02051-9005-0025
FISCO terminal block assembly
(1)
Electronics board
02051-9005-0026
Part number
Assemblies for 4-20 mA HART
4-20 mA HART for use without D4 option
02051-9001-0001
4-20 mA HART for use with D4 option
02051-9001-0002
4-20 mA HART NAMUR Compliant (C4/CN option) for use with or without D4
option
02051-9001-0011
Assembly for 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power
1-5 Vdc HART
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
02051-9001-1001
193
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Assemblies for FOUNDATION fieldbus
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 1
02051-9001-2001
Use these kits when upgrading a Device Revision 1 device to Device Revision 2, or as spare parts for a Device
Revision 2 device.
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2(2)
02021-0020-5100
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2 electronics with LCD no cover(2)
02021-0020-5109
(2)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2 electronics with LCD and Aluminum cover
(2)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2 electronics with LCD and SST cover
02021-0020-5209
02021-0020-5309
Assemblies for PROFIBUS PA
PROFIBUS PA for use without LOI
02051-9001-2101
PROFIBUS PA for use with LOI
02051-9001-2102
LCD display
Part number
LCD Display Kit(3)
4-20 mA with Aluminum Housing
03031-0193-0101
4-20 mA with SST Housing
03031-0193-0111
1-5 Vdc with Aluminum Housing
03031-0193-0001
1-5 Vdc with SST Housing
03031-0193-0011
For FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 1 and Profibus PA with Aluminum Housing
(4)
03031-0193-0104
For FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2 with Aluminum Housing
03031-0199-0013
For FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 1 and Profibus PA with SST Housing
03031-0193-0112
(4)
For FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2 with SST Housing
03031-0199-0023
LCD Displays Only(5)
For 4-20 mA output
03031-0193-0103
For 1-5 Vdc Low Power output
03031-0193-0003
For FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA Output
03031-0193-0105
For FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Revision 2(4)
03031-0199-0003
LCD Display Hardware, both 4-20 mA and 1-5 Vdc Low Power
Aluminum Display Cover Assembly 4-20 mA HART, 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power, and
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2(6)
03031-0193-0002
SST Display Cover Assembly 4-20 mA HART 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power, and
FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2(6)
03031-0193-0012
Aluminum Display Cover Assembly, FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and
PROFIBUS PA(6)
03031-0193-0007
SST Display Cover Assembly, FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS PA(6)
03031-0193-0013
O-ring package for electronics housing cover, pkg of 12
03031-0232-0001
Zero and span hardware adjustments (D4 option)
Part number
Zero and Span Kit for 4-20 mA HART(7)
Zero and Span Kit for Aluminum Housing
02051-9010-0001
Zero and Span Kit for SST Housing
02051-9010-0002
Zero and Span Kit for 4-20 mA HART NAMUR Compliant (C4/CN) option
194
(8)
Zero and Span Kit for Aluminum Housing
02051-9010-1001
Zero and Span Kit for SST Housing
02051-9010-1002
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
O-ring packages (package of 12)
Part number
Electronic housing, cover (standard and meter)
03031-0232-0001
Electronics housing, module
03031-0233-0001
Process flange, glass-filled PTFE
03031-0234-0001
Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE
03031-0234-0002
Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE
03031-0242-0001
Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE
03031-0242-0002
Flanges
Part number
Differential Coplanar Flange
Nickel-plated carbon steel
03031-0388-0025
316 SST
03031-0388-0022
Cast C-276
03031-0388-0023
Gage Coplanar Flange
Nickel-plated carbon steel
03031-0388-1025
316 SST
03031-0388-1022
Cast C-276
03031-0388-1023
Coplanar Flange Alignment Screw (package of 12)
03031-0309-0001
Traditional Flange
316 SST
03031-0320-0002
Cast C-276
03031-0320-0003
Level Flange, Vertical Mount
2 in., class 150, SST
03031-0393-0221
2 in., class 300, SST
03031-0393-0222
3 in., class 150, SST
03031-0393-0231
3 in., class 300, SST
03031-0393-0232
DIN, DN 50, PN 40
03031-0393-1002
DIN, DN 80, PN 40
03031-0393-1012
Flange adapter
Part number
Nickel-plated carbon steel
02024-0069-0005
316 SST
02024-0069-0002
Cast C-276
02024-0069-0003
Drain/vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter)
Part number
Differential Drain/Vent Kits
316 SST stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0022
Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0023
316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0022
Alloy C-276ceramic ball drain/vent kit
01151-0028-0123
Gage Drain/Vent Kits
316 SST stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0012
Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0013
316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0012
Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
01151-0028-0113
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
195
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Mounting brackets
Part number
2051C and 2051L Coplanar Flange Bracket Kit
B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts
03031-0189-0003
2051T Bracket Kit
B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts
03031-0189-0004
2051C Traditional Flange Bracket Kits
B1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0001
B2 bracket, panel mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0002
B3 flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0003
B7 (B1 style bracket with SST bolts)
03031-0313-0007
B8 (B2 style bracket with SST bolts)
03031-0313-0008
B9 (B3 style bracket with SST bolts)
03031-0313-0009
BA (SST B1 bracket with SST bolts)
03031-0313-0011
BC (SST B3 bracket with SST bolts)
03031-0313-0013
Bolt kits
Part number
COPLANAR FLANGE
Flange Bolt Kit (44 mm [1.75 in.]) (Set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0312-0001
316 SST
03031-0312-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0312-0003
ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
03031-0312-0005
Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit (73 mm [2.88 in.}) (set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0306-0001
316 SST
03031-0306-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0306-0003
ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
03031-0306-0005
Manifold/Flange Kit (57 mm [2.25 in.]) (set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0311-0001
316 SST
03031-0311-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0311-0003
ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
03031-0311-0020
TRADITIONAL FLANGE
Differential Flange and Adapter Bolt Kit (44 mm [1.75 in.]) (set of 8)
Carbon steel
03031-0307-0001
316 SST
03031-0307-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0307-0003
ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
03031-0307-0005
Gage Flange and Adapter Bolt Kit (set of 6)
196
Carbon steel
03031-0307-1001
316 SST
03031-0307-1002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0307-1003
ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
03031-0307-1005
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Manifold/Traditional Flange Bolts
Carbon steel
Use bolts supplied
with manifold
316 SST
Use bolts supplied
with manifold
LEVEL FLANGE, VERTICAL MOUNT
Flange Bolt Kit (set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0395-0001
316 SST
03031-0395-0002
Covers
Part number
Aluminum terminal cover assembly
03031-0292-0001
316 SST terminal cover assembly
03031-0292-0002
(9)
SST FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS electronics cover assembly
03031-0292-0004
Aluminum FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS electronics cover
assembly(10)
03031-0292-0003
Aluminum HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2 LCD Display Cover
Assembly: Cover + O-ring
03031-0193-0002
SST HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 2 LCD Display Cover Assembly: Cover
+ O-ring
03031-0193-0012
Aluminum FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS LCD Display Cover
Assembly: Cover + O-ring
03031-0193-0007
SST FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Rev 1 and PROFIBUS LCD Display Cover Assembly:
Cover + O-ring
03031-0193-0013
Wireless
Part number
Wireless battery compartment cover with O-ring
00708-9050-0001
Wireless LCD display meter with cover and O-ring
02051-9020-0001
Wireless LCD display meter
02051-9020-0002
Wireless LCD display meter cover
02051-9020-0003
Wireless electronics cover
02051-9021-0001
Wireless electronics cover O-ring
02051-9021-0002
Wireless lock ring screw
02051-9022-0001
Miscellaneous
Part number
External ground screw assembly (option V5)
03031-0398-0001
(1) For use with Device Revision 1 and Device Revision 2.
(2) Kit upgrades a Revision 1 2051 to a Revision 2 2051 and spares a Device Revision 2.
(3) Kit includes LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header, cover assembly.
(4) For use with Device Revision 2 only.
(5) Displays include LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header. No cover assembly.
(6) Display Cover Assembly includes the cover and O-ring only.
(7) Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments and electronics board.
(8) Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments only.
(9) Cover Assemblies include cover and O-ring.
(10) Covers are blind, not for use with LCD display. Refer to LCD display section for LCD display covers.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
197
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
October 2014
198
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Appendix B
Product Certifications
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1
page 199
page 199
page 200
page 208
page 210
Overview
This Appendix contains information on approved manufacturing locations, European directive
information, Ordinary Location certification, Hazardous Locations Certifications and approval
drawings.
B.2
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
B.2.1
Warnings
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
this section of the Model 2051 Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a safe
installation.
Before connecting a communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.

In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.


Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.

Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Cable gland and plug must comply with the requirements listed on the certificates.
Product Certifications
199
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
B.3
Product certifications
B.3.1
European Directive Information
A copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at the end of the Quick Start Guide. The
most recent revision of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at www.rosemount.com.
B.3.2
Ordinary Location Certification
As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets
the basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by a nationally recognized
test laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA).
B.3.3
North America
E5
FM Explosionproof (XP) and Dust-Ignitionproof (DIP)
Certificate: 3032938
Standards: FM Class 3600 – 2011, FM Class 3615 – 2006, FM Class 3810 – 2005,
ANSI/NEMA 250 – 1991. ANSI/IEC 60529 2004
Markings: XP CL I, DIV 1, GP B, C, D; DIP CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; CL III; T5(-50 °C  Ta 
+85 °C); Factory Sealed; Type 4X
I5
FM Intrinsic Safety (IS) and Nonincendive (NI)
Certificate: 3033457
Standards: FM Class 3600 – 1998, FM Class 3610 – 2007, FM Class 3611 – 2004, FM Class
3810 – 2005
Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D; CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; Class III; DIV 1 when
connected per Rosemount drawing 02051-1009; Class I, Zone 0; AEx ia IIC T4;
NI CL 1, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D; T4(-50 °C  Ta  +70 °C); Type 4x
IE
FM FISCO
Certificate: 3033457
Standards: FM Class 3600 – 1998, FM Class 3610 – 2007, FM Class 3611 – 2004, FM Class
3810 – 2005
Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D when connected per Rosemount drawing
02051-1009 (-50°C  Ta  +60°C); Type 4x
E6
CSA Explosion-Proof, Dust Ignition Proof
Certificate: 2041384
Standards: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-10, CSA Std C22.2 No. 25-1966, CSA Std C22.2 No.
30-M1986, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 94-M91, CSA Std C22.2 No.142-M1987,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.157-92, CSA Std C22.2 No. 213-M1987,
CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-1:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11-02,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60529:05, ANSI/ISA-12.27.01–2003
Markings: Explosion-Proof for Class I, Divisions 1, Groups B, C, and D. Dust-Ignition
Proof for Class II and Class III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Suitable for Class I,
Division 2; Groups A, B, C, and D for indoor and outdoor hazardous locations.
Class I Zone 1 Ex d IIC T5. Enclosure type 4X, factory sealed. Single Seal.
200
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
I6
October 2014
CSA Intrinsic Safety
Certificate: 2041384
Standards: CSA Std. C22.2 No. 142 - M1987, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, CSA Std.
C22.2 No. 157 - 92, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 –
2003, CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11:02
Markings: Intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D when connected in
accordance with Rosemount drawings 02051-1008. Temperature code T3C.
Class I Zone 1 Ex ia IIC T3C. Single Seal. Enclosure Type 4X
B.3.4
Europe
E1
ATEX Flameproof
Certificate: KEMA 08ATEX0090X
Standards: EN60079-0:2006, EN60079-1:2007, EN60079-26:2007
II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T6 IP66(–50 °C  Ta  65 °C);
II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T5 IP66(–50 °C  Ta  80 °C)
Markings:
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands and wiring needs to be suitable for a
temperature of 90 °C.
2.
This device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take
into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected.
The manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure
safety during its expected lifetime.
3.
In case of repair, contact the manufacturer for information on the dimensions of the
flameproof joints.
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X
Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012
Markings:
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (–60 °C  Ta +70 °C)
Table B-1. Input Parameters
HART®
Fieldbus/PROFIBUS®
Voltage Ui
30 V
30 V
Current Ii
200 mA
300 mA
Power Pi
1W
1.3 W
0.012  F
0 F
0 mH
0 mH
Capacitance Ci
Inductance Li
Product Certifications
201
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account
during installation.
2.
The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane
paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when
located in Zone 0.
IA
ATEX FISCO
Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X
Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012
Markings:
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (–60 °C Ta 60 °C)
Table B-2. Input Parameters
HART
Voltage Ui
17.5 V
Current Ii
380 mA
Power Pi
5.32 W
Capacitance Ci
0 F
Inductance Li
0 mH
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account
during installation.
2.
The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane
paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when
located in Zone 0.
N1
ATEX Type n
Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0130X
Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-15:2010
Markings:
II 3G Ex na IIC T4 Gc (–40 °C Ta +70 °C)
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1.
ND
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of by EN
60079-15:2010. This must be taken into account during installation.
ATEX Dust
Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0182X
Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-31:2009
Markings:
202
II 1D Ex ta IIIC T95 °C T500 105 °C Da (–20 °C Ta +85 °C)
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1.
B.3.5
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account
during installation.
International
E7
IECEx Flameproof
Certificate: IECExKEM08.0024X
Standards: IEC60079-0:2004, IEC60079-1:2007-04, IEC60079-26:2006
Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 IP66, T6(-50 °C  Ta  +65 °C), T5(-50 °C  Ta  +80 °C)
Table B-3. Process Temperature
Temperature class
Process temperature
T6
-50 °C to +65 °C
-50 °C to +80 °C
T5
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
The device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take
into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected.
The manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure
safety during its expected lifetime.
2.
The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a temperature
of 90 °C
3.
In case of repair, contact the manufacturer for information on the dimensions of the
flameproof joints.
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X
Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (-60 °C  Ta  +70 °C)
Table B-4. Input Parameters
HART
Fieldbus/PROFIBUS
Voltage Ui
30 V
30 V
Current Ii
200 mA
300 mA
Power Pi
1W
1.3 W
0.012  F
0 F
0 mH
0 mH
Capacitance Ci
Inductance Li
Product Certifications
203
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account
during installation.
2.
The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane
paint finish; however, care should be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if
located in Zone 0.
IG
IECEx FISCO
Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X
Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (–60 °C Ta 60 °C)
Table B-5. Input Parameters
FISCO
Voltage Ui
17.5 V
Current Ii
380 mA
Power Pi
5.32 W
Capacitance Ci
0 nF
Inductance Li
0 H
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is incapable of
withstanding the 500V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account
during installation.
2.
The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane
paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when
located in Zone 0.
N7
IECEx Type n
Certificate: IECExBAS08.0046X
Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-15:2010
Markings: Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (-40 °C  Ta  +70 °C)
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1.
204
If fitted with a 90V transient suppressor, the equipment is not capable of withstanding
the 500V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of IEC60079-15:2010. This
must be taken into account during installation.
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
B.3.6
October 2014
Brazil
E2
INMETRO Flameproof
Certificate: CEPEL 09.1767X, CEPEL 11.2065X, UL-BR 14.0375X
Standards: ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008, ABNT NBR IEC60079-1:2009, ABNT NBR
IEC60079-26:2008, ABNT NBR IEC60529:2009, ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008 +
Errata 1:2011, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-1:2009 + Errata 1:2011, ABNT NBR IEC
60079-26:2008 + Errata 1:2009
Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 Ga/Gb IP66, T6(-50 °C Ta +65 °C), T5(-50 °C Ta +80 °C)
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
The device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take
into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected.
The manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in
detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime.
2.
The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a temperature
of 90 °C.
3.
In case of repair, contact the manufacturer for information on the dimensions of the
flameproof joints
I2
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
Certificate: CEPEL 09.1768X, CEPEL 11.2066X
Standards: ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008, ABNT NBR IEC60079-11:2009, ABNT NBR IEC
60079-26: 2008, ABNT NBR IEC60529:2009
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66W (-60 °C Ta +70 °C)
Table B-6. Input Parameters
HART
Fieldbus/PROFIBUS
Voltage Ui
30 V
30 V
Current Ii
200 mA
300 mA
Power Pi
0.9 W
1.3 W
0.012  F
0 F
0 mH
0 mH
Capacitance Ci
Inductance Li
Specific Condition for Safe Use (X):
1.
IB
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is not capable of
withstanding the 500V insulation test required by ABNT NBR IRC 60079-11:2008. This
must be taken into account when installing the equipment.
INMETRO FISCO
Certificate: CEPEL 09.1768X, CEPEL 11.2066X
Standards: ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008, ABNT NBR IEC60079-11:2009, ABNT NBR IEC
60079-26: 2008, ABNT NBR IEC60529:2009
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66W (–60 °C Ta 60 °C)
Product Certifications
205
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Table B-7. Input Parameters
FISCO
Voltage Ui
17.5 V
Current Ii
380 mA
Power Pi
5.32 W
Capacitance Ci
0 nF
Inductance Li
0 H
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1.
B.3.7
If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is not capable of
withstanding the 500V insulation test required by ABNT NBR IRC 60079-11:2008. This
must be taken into account when installing the equipment.
China
E3
China Flameproof
Certificate: GYJ13.1386X; GYJ101321X [Flowmeters]
Standards: GB3836.1-2000, GB3836.2-2000
Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5, T6(–50 °C Ta 65 °C), T5(–50 °C Ta 80 °C)
Specific Conditions for Safe Use:
1.
2.
Symbol “X” is used to denote specific conditions of use:
–
The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a
temperature of 90 °C
–
This device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use
shall take into account the environment conditions to which the diaphragm
will be subjected.
The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is:
Ta
Temperature class
-50 °C  Ta  +80 °C
T5
T6
-50 °C  Ta  +65 °C
206
3.
The earth connection facility in the enclosure should be connected reliably.
4.
During installation, use and maintenance of the product, observe the warning “Don’t
open the cover when the circuit is alive.”
5.
During installation, there should be no mixture harmful to flameproof housing
6.
Cable entry and conduit, certified by NEPSI with type of protection Ex d IIC and
appropriate thread form, should be applied when installed in a hazardous location.
Blanking elements should be used on the redundant cable entries.
7.
End users are not permitted to change any internal components, but to settle the
problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product.
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
8.
Maintenance should be done in a non-hazardous location.
9.
During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following
standards: GB3836.13-1997, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB50257-1996
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
Certificate: GYJ12.1295X; GYJ101320X [Flowmeters]
Standards: GB3836.1-2010, GB3836.4-2010, GB3836.20-2010
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Specific Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1.
Symbol “X” is used to denote specific conditions of use:
a.
If the apparatus is fitted with an optional 90V transient suppressor, it is not capable of
withstanding the 500V insulation test for 1 minute. This must be taken into account
when installing the apparatus.
b. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane
paint finish; however, care should be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if
located in Zone 0.
2.
The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is:
Model
T code
Temperature range
HART, Fieldbus, PROFIBUS, and Low Power
T4
-60 °C  Ta  +70 °C
FISCO
T4
T4
-60 °C  Ta  +60 °C
Flowmeter with 644 Temp Housing
3.
-40 °C  Ta  +60 °C
Intrinsically Safe parameters:
HART
Fieldbus/PROFIBUS
FISCO
Voltage Ui
30 V
30 V
17.5 V
Current Ii
200 mA
300 mA
380 mA
Power Pi
1W
1.3 W
5.32 W
0.012  F
0 F
0 nF
0 mH
0 mH
0 H
Capacitance Ci
Inductance Li
Note 1: FISCO parameters comply with the requirements for FISCO field devices in
GB3836.19-2010
Note 2: [For Flowmeters] When 644 temperature transmitter is used, the 644
temperature transmitter should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to
establish explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres.
Wiring and terminals should comply with the instruction manual of both 644
temperature transmitter and associated apparatus. The cables between 644
temperatures transmitter and associated apparatus should be shielded cables (the
cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably in a
non-hazardous area.
4.
Product Certifications
The product should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to establish
explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres. Wiring and
terminals should comply with the instruction manual of the product and associated
apparatus.
207
Appendix B: Product Certifications
B.3.8
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
5.
The cables between this product and associated apparatus should be shielded cables
(the cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably
in a non-hazardous area.
6.
End users are not permitted to change any internal components, and needs to settle
the problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product.
7.
During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following
standards: GB3836.13-1997, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB50257-1996
Japan
E4
Japan Flameproof
Certificate: TC20598, TC20599, TC20602, TC20603 [HART]; TC20600, TC20601,
TC20604, TC20605 [Fieldbus]
Markings: Ex d IIC T5
B.3.9
B.4
Combinations
K1
Combination of E1, I1, N1, and ND
K2
Combination of E2 and I2
K5
Combination of E5 and I5
K6
Combination of E6 and I6
K7
Combination of E7, I7, and N7
KB
Combination of K5 and K6
KD
Combination of K1, K5, and K6
Additional Certifications
SBS
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval
Certificate: 09-HS446883B-3-PDA
Intended Use: Marine & Offshore Applications – Measurement of either Gauge or
Absolute Pressure for Liquid, Gas, and Vapor.
ABS Rules: 2013 Steel Vessels Rules 1-1-4/7.7, 1-1-Appendix 3, 4-8-3/1.7, 4-8-3/13.1
SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval
Certificate: 23157/A2 BV
BV Rules: Bureau Veritas Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships
Application: Class notations: AUT-UMS, AUT-CCS, AUT-PORT and AUT-IMS; Pressure
transmitter type 2051 cannot be installed on diesel engines
SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval
Certificate: A-13245
Intended Use: Det Norske Veritas’ Rules for Classification of Ships, High Speed & Light
Craft Det Norske Veritas’ Offshore Standards
208
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Application:
Location classes
SLL
Type
2051
Temperature
D
Humidity
B
Vibration
A
EMC
B
Enclosure
D
Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval
Certificate: 11/60002
Application: Environmental categories ENV1, ENV2, ENV3, and ENV5
Product Certifications
209
Appendix B: Product Certifications
B.5
Approval drawings
B.5.1
Factory mutual 02051-1009
210
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
211
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
212
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
213
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
214
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
215
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
216
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
217
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
218
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
219
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
220
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
221
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
222
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
B.5.2
October 2014
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 02051-1008
Product Certifications
223
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
224
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
225
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
226
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
227
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
228
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
229
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
230
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
Product Certifications
Appendix B: Product Certifications
October 2014
231
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
October 2014
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
232
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0200-4101, Rev BA
October 2014
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale.
The Emerson logo, AMS, and DeltaV are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co.
Instrument Toolkit, PlantWeb, Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, Annubar, and Coplanar are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.
Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Corporation
Syltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation.
Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc.
WirelessHART and HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
FOUNDATION fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
DTM is a registered trademark of the FDT Group.
PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFINET International (PI).
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2014 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.
Emerson Process Management
Rosemount Measurement
8200 Market Boulevard
Chanhassen, MN 55317 USA
Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307
Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888
Fax +1 952 906 8889
Emerson Process Management
GmbH & Co.
Argelsrieder Feld 3
82234 Wessling
Germany
Tel 49 (8153) 9390
Fax 49 (8153) 939172
Emerson Process Management Asia
Pacific Private Limited
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
T (65) 6777 8211
F (65) 6777 0947
[email protected]
Beijing Rosemount Far East
Instrument Co., Limited
No. 6 North Street,
Hepingli, Dong Cheng District
Beijing 100013, China
T (86) (10) 6428 2233
F (86) (10) 6422 8586
Emerson Process Management
(India) Private Ltd.
Delphi Building, B Wing, 6th Floor
Hiranandani Gardens, Powai
Mumbai 400076, India
T (91) 22 6662-0566
F (91) 22 6662-0500
Emerson Process Management,
Brazil
Av. Hollingsworth, 325 - Iporanga
Sorocaba, SP – 18087-000, Brazil
T (55) 15 3238-3788
F (55) 15 3228-3300
Emerson Process Management,
Russia
29 Komsomolsky prospekt
Chelyabinsk, 454138
Russia
T (7) 351 798 8510
F (7) 351 741 8432
Emerson Process Management,
Dubai
Emerson FZE
P.O. Box 17033,
Jebel Ali Free Zone - South 2
Dubai, U.A.E.
T (971) 4 8118100
F (971) 4 8865465
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement